P R E L I M I N A R Y 2.JUN.

2024
GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM

Technical Publication

Venue™ R5
Service Manual
Direction Number: 5945168-100

Operating Documentation

©2024 General Electric Company.

P R E L I M I N A R Y

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Venue™ Models Covered in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Overview of the Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
How to Activate the Venue™ and Wireless Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
How to Turn the Scanner ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
How to Check for Hardware/Software Version and Installed Options . . . 1-5
Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
Venue™ Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Patient Data Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17

Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 19

Product Labels and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20

Universal Product Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Label Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Venue™ External Labels Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28

Table of Contents 1
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31
General Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32
Chapter 2: Site Preparation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2
Unit Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Cooling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Lighting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Time and Manpower Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Venue™ Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Mains Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
EMI Prevention/Abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Operation and storage temperatures for probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6

Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Required Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Suggested Minimal Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Recommended Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Networking Pre-Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Stand-alone Unit (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Unit Connected to Hospital’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
DICOM Option Pre-Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11

Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12

Table of Contents 2
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Chapter 3: System Setup

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

Setup Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Average Setup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Setup Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
System Acclimation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

Warnings for Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Unpacking the Shipping Carton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10

Preparing for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11

Verifying Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Damage Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Front View of the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Rear View of the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Peripheral/Accessory Interface Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14

Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 15

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
System Requirements Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Mass with Monitor and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Acoustic Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Verification of the Venue™ Voltage Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Electrical Specifications for the Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Connections on the I/O Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Connect Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Connect USB Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Introduction to Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Disconnect Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Connect a wireless probe - Pairing Probe Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Table of Contents 3
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Power on/Boot up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Power Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Complete Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Venue™ Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
EZ Config - Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Accessing System Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Enter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
Adjust Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
Select Language for User Interface and Online Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Select Units of Measure and Controls Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Service Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Open Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Approved Internal Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Approved External Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
External Peripherals for Connection to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Software Option Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
To Install a Software Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Remote Check and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35

Connectivity Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Stand-alone Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Wireless Connection from Venue™ to DICOM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

Connectivity Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
Select TCP/IP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
Finding the system network MAC (Physical) addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
Set up Wireless connection (For broadcasting SSID networks) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
Setting Up Non-Broadcasting (Hidden) Wireless Network Connection . . . . . . 3 - 41
Network Proxy/DNS/WINS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
Proxy setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
DNS/WINS setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46
Setup QView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48
QView Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48
Changing the AE Title and/or Port Number (Port No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
DICOM Server IP Address on the Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 50
Verify the Network Connection to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
Verify the Connection to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
Table of Contents 4
P R E L I M I N A R Y

DICOM Storage Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53

DICOM Web Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54
DICOM SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 55
Set Barcode Reader for patient QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
Export Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
Contents in this Sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
Setup on the Remote Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
Configurable Remote Path User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Query/Retrieve Setup on the Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Query/Retrieve Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
TLS - Transport Layer Security V1.2 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
Security LDAP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64
RFID badge configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 65
RSVP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 66

Options Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68
Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68
USB Flash Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68
Wireless Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68
Wireless Probe 1st time Registration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68

Registration and Pairing (First-time Activation) of Wireless Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69

Purchase Vscan Air Wireless probe and license key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69
Verify External Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69
Turn ON wireless probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69
Perform Wireless-Probe first time connection (Registration and pairing) . . . . . 3 - 70
Perform Probe Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 70
Register the probe to GE HealthCare Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73
Connect and Use activated (paired and registered) probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77

Paperwork After Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 79

Installation Acceptance Test Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 79
User’s Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 79
Product Locator Installation Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 79
Chapter 4: General Procedures and Functional Checks
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

General Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power ON/Boot-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

Table of Contents 5
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Connecting AC (Mains) Power to the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Switch ON the AC Power to Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Power Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Logging On to the Venue™ as “ADM” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Select Config via the Cockpit (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
The Login dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Deleting Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Cockpit (Monitor) Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
To Adjust the Cockpit (Monitor) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Moving and Transporting the Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
The Casters (Wheels) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
To Prepare the Venue™ to be Moved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Ensure Safety while Moving the Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Transporting the Venue™ by Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
At the New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12

Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Performance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Test Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
2D Mode (B Mode) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Adjust the 2D Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
M-Mode Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Using M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Optimizing M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Using Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
PW and CW Doppler Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
Using PW/CW Doppler Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Optimizing PW/CW Doppler Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Probe/Connectors Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Cineloop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Using Cineloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Audio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21

Table of Contents 6
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Printer Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Windows Print Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
ECG Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Mechanical Functions Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Monitor Articulated Arm Movement Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Swivel and Full Lock Casters Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Electrical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Ground Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Chapter 5: Components and Function (Theory)
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
System Configuration and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 4

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 5
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Stand-alone Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Direct Connection from Venue™ to a Review Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Venue™ and a DICOM Server in a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5

InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
InSite ExC Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Initiating a Request For Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
RFS History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
InSite Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
InSite Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Exiting InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10

My GE HealthCare Utilization reporting (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 11

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Configure iCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Configure Imaging Insights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12

Cockpit (Monitor) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 13

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Probe Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Power On/Off Touch Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Sleep Mode Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
AC Power LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Table of Contents 7
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Cockpit (Monitor) LED Indicators States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15

LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Monitor - LCD Display Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Monitor - LCD Display Optical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
LCD Controller and Touch Module Configuration Interface . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Auxiliary Display (AD) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Battery Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18

External Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19

Front End Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Front End Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Front End (T-CFE) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Probe Selection Board (T-PSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
T-PSB Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23

Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Back End Processing (BEP) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Back End Interface (BIB) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Solid State Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26

System Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
AC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
DC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
System Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Rechargeable Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Battery - General Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Internal Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
ECG Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
External Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Wi-Fi Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Bar-code reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31

Table of Contents 8
P R E L I M I N A R Y
Chapter 6: Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

Power Supply Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1

Cockpit (Monitor) Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

Articulated Arm Movement Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Arm Movement Adjustment - General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tilt Resistance Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Pan (Swivel) Resistance Adjustments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Arm Vertical Movement Adjustments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Arm Rotate Resistance Adjustments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Chapter 7: Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3

Gathering Troubleshooting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Collect a ‘Trouble Image’ with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Advanced Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

RSVP Service Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6

Disruptive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
Color Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Software Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Connected Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Gather Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Delete Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Third Party Software Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16

Network Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22

Probe Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25

Table of Contents 9
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Using the Probe Check Tool: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Pass result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
Failed result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28

e-Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 29
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Accessing GE HealthCare portal and downloading SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Burning Disk-on-Key Media with SW Downloaded from GE HealthCare Portal 7 - 34
Obtain SW update directly through RSVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37
Verify WIFI and RSVP connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37
Download and install the new SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
To Rollback and install the previous (backed-up) SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46
To upload SW from USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47

Noise Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 51
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Overview of Types of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Noise Picked Up from the Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Noise Received via the External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Intermittent Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
Self-generated Noise Generated inside the Ultrasound system) . . . . . . 7 - 52
Heat Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
Different Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
Different System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53
Different Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53
Disconnect External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53

Audio Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
Audio Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54

Probes not Recognized Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56
Probes not Recognized Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56

System does not turn on Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57
Cockpit ON/OFF Button turns orange -->BEP BIOS Jumper Setup . . . . . . . . . 7 - 58
BEP Fan does not Spin (ON/OFF button is Orange)-->MPB to BIB Connection 7 - 59
Application error: “Abnormal system behavior”-->Front End Connections . . . 7 - 60
Table of Contents 10
P R E L I M I N A R Y

No Auxiliary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 61

MPB Diagnostics Failure Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
MPB Diagnostics Procedure Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62

RFID Badge Scanning Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
Multifactor login and Grace period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
Group Mapping configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67
Certificate installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67

ViewPoint Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70

Venue HDMI connection troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 71

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 71

Wireless Probe Indications and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 72

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 72
Chapter 8: Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1

Accessories - Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . 8-1
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Removal Procedure . . . . . 8-2
Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Installation Procedure . . . . 8-2
Power Cable Holder Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Power Cable Holder Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Power Cable Holder Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Covers - Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4

Overview of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Table of Contents 11
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Preparation for Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Lower Front eTower Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Left Side eTower Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Right Side eTower Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Upper eTower Front Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Printer Insert Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Printer Insert Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Printer Insert Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
MPB Door Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
RS Probe Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

Table of Contents 12
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Riser Thermal Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Riser Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Riser Cover Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Riser Cover Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21

System Modules- Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 23

Base Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Base Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Base Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Front End Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Front End Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Front End Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Front End Metal Door Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Front End Metal Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Front End Metal Door Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 32
SSD Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
SSD Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
SSD Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34
Cockpit (Monitor) Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35

Table of Contents 13
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35

Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
PSU Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
PSU Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
PSU Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Battery Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Battery Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Battery Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Back End (BE) Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
BE Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
BE Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
BIOS battery Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
BIOS battery replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
BEP PCB Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
BEP PCB Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
BEP PCB Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
MPB Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
MPB Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
MPB Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
T-CFE2 Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
T-CFE2 Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
T-CFE2 Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62
T-PSB Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64

Table of Contents 14
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
T-PSB Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
T-PSB Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65

Electronic Boards- Replacement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 66

BIB Board Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
BIB Board Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
BIB Board Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
T-CFE Release Arm Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
CFE Board Release Arm Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
T-CFE Release Arm Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Front End Power Supply Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
T-CFE2 Fan box Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
T-CFE2 Fan box Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
T-CFE2 Fan box Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74

Mechanical Parts- Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 75

MPB Front Metal Door Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
MPB Guide L and Guide R Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
MPB Guide L/R Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
MPB Guide L/R Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Halo Handle Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80

Table of Contents 15
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Halo Handle Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Halo Handle Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 82
Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Arm Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Arm Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Venue Locking Release Handle Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Handle Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Handle Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Riser Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Riser Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Riser Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Casters Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Casters Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Casters Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
T-CFE Plastic Cable Guide Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Plastic Cable Guide for CFE Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 97
Plastic Cable Guide for CFE Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
MPB Blower (Fan) Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
MPB Blower (Fan) Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
MPB Fan Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
IPP Module Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
IPP Module Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
IPP Module Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107

Table of Contents 16
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Cables - Replacement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108

MPB Rear USB Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
MPB Rear USB Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
MPB Rear USB Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
MPB TO Cockpit Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
MPB TO Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
MPB TO Cockpit Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
BE to Cockpit Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
BE to Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
BE to Cockpit Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
MPB to BE PWR Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 136
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 136
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 136
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 136
MPB to BE PWR Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 136
MPB TO BE PWR Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
ON/OFF Switch Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
ON/OFF Switch Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
ON/OFF Switch Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
PCIe Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
PCIe Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
PCIe Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 143
MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144

Table of Contents 17
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
MPB to BIB Control Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
MPB to BIB Control Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Printer USB Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Printer USB Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Printer USB Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
BEP Cables Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
BEP Cables Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
BEP Cables Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
MPB TO T-FEPS - FRU Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 157
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 157
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 157
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 157
MPB TO T-FEPS Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 157
MPB TO T-FEPS Cable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Replacement Procedure . . . . . . 8 - 160
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 160
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 160
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 160
MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Removal Procedure . . . . . 8 - 160
MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Installation Procedure . . . 8 - 163

Peripherals Replacement/Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 164

Printer Replacement/Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Printer Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Printer Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Printer) . 8 - 165
Printer Installation Procedure (For Systems with Existing Printer) . . . 8 - 169
Wi-Fi Adapter Replacement/Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 170
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 170
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 170
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 170
Wi-Fi Adapter Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 170
Wi-Fi Adapter Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Wi-Fi
Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 171
Barcode Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 171
ECG Installation Procedure for Systems with No Printer Installed . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173

Table of Contents 18
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173
ECG Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173
ECG Installation Procedure for Systems with Printer Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
ECG Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
ECG Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
ECG Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
ECG Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 183
Wireless Probe Charger Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Wireless probe Charger Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Wireless probe Charger Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 184
Extension cable for WIFI/BT Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Extension cable for WIFI/BT Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Extension cable for WIFI/BT charger Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . 8 - 187

Operating System and Application Software Loading Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 189

Software Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Reformatting Disk-on-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 193
Software Upgrade Procedure to Venue™ R5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Backup of System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Backup of Patient Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 196
Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 198
Software Installation Procedure - General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 204
Preparation for Software Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 204
Operating System and/or Application Software Installation Procedure 8 - 205
Software Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 206
Software Recovery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210

Functional Checks to be Performed after Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 214

General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 214
Functional Checks Required per Replacement Part Category . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 214
Chapter 9: Renewal Parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Table of Contents 19
P R E L I M I N A R Y

List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 2

Main Assemblies and Sub Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

Renewal Parts Lists and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 4

Mechanical Hardware Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
System Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
Cockpit (Monitor) Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
eTower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Back End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Back End Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
System Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 21
Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
ECG List of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Chapter 10: Care and Maintenance
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 1
Care and Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

Why Do Maintenance? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Tools Required for Servicing the Venue™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5

System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10

Table of Contents 20
P R E L I M I N A R Y

Cleaning the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11

Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Returning and Shipping of Defective Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14

Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19

Table of Contents 21
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Important Precautions

TRANSLATION POLICY

- i
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- ii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- iii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- iv
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- v
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- vi
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- vii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- viii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- ix
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- x
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- xi
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- xii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

- xiii
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE HealthCare representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage
MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after
receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE HealthCare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE HealthCare will use its own specially trained field
engineers. All of GE HealthCare’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements
of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE HealthCare equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE HealthCare’s
field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed
electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE HealthCare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number or direction number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.

Mail the information to:

Service Documentation,

GE Medical Systems
Ultrasound & Primary Care Diagnostics LLC
3200 N Grandview Blvd
Wauwatosa, WI 53188
USA

GE HealthCare employees should use TrackWise to report service documentation issues. These issues
will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.

WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1 Safety Considerations section in
the Service Manual.

- xiv
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

LEGAL NOTES

The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE HealthCare.

GE HealthCare makes no representations or warranties with respect to the information herein. In

addition, the information is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the
preparation of this document. Nevertheless, GE HealthCare assumes no responsibility for errors,
omissions, or any damages, including special or consequential, resulting from the use of this
information. GE HealthCare will issue updates to this information periodically, as needed. If there are
any questions regarding the information contained in this manual, please contact your GE HealthCare
Representative.'

TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.

COPYRIGHTS
©by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved.

- xv
P R E L I M I N A R Y 6/2/24
POC_PRECAUTIONS_LEGAL

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Revision History

Date Reason for change DOC ID Doc Revision

6-September-2023 Initial Release DOC2782487 1

* Add QR code configuration

25-May-2024 DOC2782487 2
* Add Dicom web configuration

List of Effected Pages (LOEP)

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Add barcode reader through

3-51, 3-52, 3-57, 3-
Add Dicom web configuration 3-60 patient QR code
58
configuration

- xvi
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Venue™ ultrasound scanner.
The service provider must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or
servicing a unit.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-2
Service Manual Overview
This manual provides setup and service information for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner. The ten
chapters it contains are outlined in Table 1-1 below.

In the beginning of the manual, before Chapter 1, you will find the language policy for GE HealthCare
service documentation, legal information, a revision overview and the Table of Contents (TOC).

An Index has not been included.

1-2-1 Contents in this Service Manual

The service manual is divided into ten chapters.

In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the language policy for GE HealthCare
service documentation, legal information, a revision overview and the Table of Contents (TOC).

An Index has not been included.

Table 1-1 Contents in this Service Manual

CHP NUMBER TITLE DESCRIPTION

Chapter 1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
Contains pre-setup requirements for the Venue™ ultrasound
Chapter 2 Site Preparations scanner.

Chapter 3 System Setup Contains setup procedure with an setup checklist.

General Procedures and Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the
Chapter 4
Functional Checks setup, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.

Venue™Components and Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the

Chapter 5
Function (Theory) electronic circuits.
Contains instructions on how to make any available service
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
adjustments to the Venue™ ultrasound scanner.
Provides instructions for setting up and running diagnostic,
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting troubleshooting and other related routines for the Venue™
ultrasound scanner.
Provides removal and installation procedures for replacement of
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the Venue™
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts ultrasound scanner.
Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the Venue™
Chapter 10 Care and Maintenance
ultrasound scanner.

NOTE: The illustrations provided in this service manual are for illustration purposes only and are subject to
change without notice.

1-2-2 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual

This manual is intended for the following categories of users:

• Service personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.).

• Hospital’s service personnel
• Architectural planners/installation planners (some parts of Chapter 2 -Site Preparations).

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-3 Venue™ Models Covered in this Manual

The Venue™ models documented in this manual are shown in Table 1-2 below.

Table 1-2 Venue™ Models

GP
PSI Group Cat No. Description
PSI Code Code
Venue™ R5 H45235VN Venue™ R5 ultrasound scanner UVENUO 25719A
Venue™ R5 ultrasound scanner
Venue™ R5 Wuxi H45235VNW UVENUP 25720B
WXB

Venue™ R5 upgrade kit (SW

H45235SWU Venue R5 SW upgrade UVENUR
only) N/A
Venue™ R5 upgrade kit (SW
H45235SWUW Venue R5 SW upgrade WXB UVENUR
only) Wuxi N/A
Venue™ R5 upgrade kit
H45235SHU Venue R5 SW+HW upgrade UVENUR
(SW+HW) N/A
Venue™ R5 upgrade kit
H45235SHUW Venue R5 SW+HW upgrade WXB UVENUR N/A
(SW+HW) Wuxi

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-4 Product Description

1-2-4-1 Overview of the Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner

The Venue™ is a console, phased, linear array ultrasound imaging scanner.
Weighing only 63 Kgs (139 lbs), each system is extremely versatile and, depending upon the installed
software, can be used for a variety of applications.

The system provides image generation in 2D, Color Doppler, M-Mode, Color M-Mode and PW.

The fully digital architecture of the Venue™ system allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and
probe types throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.

Signal flows from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, and then over to the Back End Processor
and finally to the cockpit and peripherals.

System configuration is stored on the Venue™ .

All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.

1-2-4-2 How to Activate the Venue™ and Wireless Probes

• To activate the wireless probes, see:Turn ON wireless probe on page 3 - 70and Perform Wireless-
Probe first time connection (Registration and pairing) on page 3 - 71

1-2-4-3 How to Turn the Scanner ON and OFF

• To turn the scanner ON see: Power on/Boot up on page 3 - 19
• To turn the scanner OFF see: Power Shut Down on page 3 - 19

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-4-4 How to Check for Hardware/Software Version and Installed Options

• To verify the hardware versions on the boards:
Refer to HW Version tab.
• To check the software versions on local software on the boards:
Refer to Software Version.
• To check for installed options:
Refer to Options Setup on page 3 - 68.

1-2-4-5 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Venue™ system, and
also kept near the unit for quick reference.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-3
Important Conventions
1-3-1 Conventions Used in this Manual

1-3-1-1 Model Designations

This manual covers the Venue™ ultrasound units listed in Table 1-2

1-3-1-2 Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.

1-3-1-3 Safety Precaution Messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards to personal are labeled in one of three ways:

• DANGER
• WARNING
• CAUTION
When a hazard is present that can cause property damage, but has absolutely no personal injury risk,
a NOTICE is used.

DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH OR SUBSTANTIAL
PROPERTY DAMAGE IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT MAY CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE IF
INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.

CAUTION CAUTION IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL OR CAN CAUSE
MINOR PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE POSSIBLE.

NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.

NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-3-2 Standard Hazard Icons

Important information will always be preceded by either the exclamation point (!) contained within a
triangle, or the symbols for “Danger”, “Warning” or “Caution”, as seen throughout this chapter and
manual. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware
of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm.

Refer to the User Manual for a complete list of icons used on the Ultrasound System; not all icons may
be listed in the table below.

Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.

Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

NOTE: The Venue™ system has no unintended or motorized moving parts that could cause pinching; all
moving parts are mechanically operated by the user.
Pay attention to move such parts carefully (e.g. articulated arm).

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-4
Safety Considerations
1-4-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the equipment.

1-4-2 Human Safety

• Operating personnel must not remove the Ultrasound system covers.
• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.

NOTE: Local laws may restrict this device for sale or use by or on the order of a physician.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE

PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
HANDLING AND TESTING.

WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING ULTRASOUND SYSTEM,

SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT
HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE.

WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, GE HealthCare HAS LIMITED THE
LIFTING WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING
OVER 16 KG (35 LBS) REQUIRES 2 PEOPLE.

WARNING FOR CONSOLE ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS AND FOR ULTRASOUND

SYSTEMS MOUNTED ON A DOCKING/ISOLATION CART, HAVE TWO
PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE ULTRASOUND
SYSTEM.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM CONSIDERABLE
DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN
INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.

WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, ONLY
INSTALL GE HealthCare APPROVED PARTS. DO NOT PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.

WARNING FOR CONSOLE ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS AND FOR ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS

MOUNTED ON A CART, WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE
GAS SHOCK IS COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING
NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE
MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SHOCK ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN
YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SHOCK.
PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SHOCK
PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION
ASSEMBLY.

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ULTRASOUND SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF AND
DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SOURCE. CORD MUST BE CONTROLLED AT ALL
TIMES.
WAIT FOR AT LEAST 30 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
ULTRASOUND SYSTEM COMPONENTS MAY BE ENERGIZED. ALWAYS REFER TO THE
ULTRASOUND SYSTEM'S SERVICE MANUAL FOR LOTO WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS.
CAPACITORS ON ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS WITH THE SHEARWAVE OPTION CAN
TAKE UP TO 5 MINUTES TO DISCHARGE.

WARNING FOR CONSOLE ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS AND FOR ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS

MOUNTED ON A CART, USE EXTREME CAUTION AS LONG AS THE ULTRASOUND
SYSTEM IS UN-STABLE, NOT RESTING ON ALL FOUR CASTERS..

WARNING FOR CONSOLE ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS AND FOR ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS

MOUNTED ON A CART, TILTING THE CONSOLE REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE IN ORDER
TO AVOID INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT..

WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PADS, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

WARNING BEWARE OF POSSIBLE SHARP EDGES ON ALL MECHANICAL PARTS. IF SHARP

EDGES ARE ENCOUNTERED, THE APPROPRIATE PPE SHOULD BE USED TO
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

WARNING WEAR ALL PPE INCLUDING GLOVES AS INDICATED IN THE CHEMICAL MSDS.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

CAUTION USE PROTECTIVE GLASSES DURING DRILLING, FILING AND DURING ALL OTHER WORK
WHERE EYES NEED PROTECTION.

CAUTION USE SAFETY SHOES WHEN DOING WORK WHERE THERE IS ANY CHANCE OF FOOT
DAMAGE.

CAUTION USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN DRILLING AND CUTTING.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-3 Mechanical Safety

WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE MONITOR IS LOCKED IN ITS
LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE
SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE
LOCKED POSITION.

DANGER WHENEVER THE UNIT IS TO BE MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE EXTREME
CAUTION. MAKE SURE THAT THE VENUE™ SCANNER AND ALL PERIPHERALS ARE
SECURELY MOUNTED IN PLACE BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO MOVE IT.

DANGER ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

DANGER NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT
MAY BE DAMAGED.

CAUTION ULTRASOUND SYSTEM WEIGHTS CAN BE SIGNIFICANT, PLUS THE WEIGHT OF INSTALLED
PERIPHERALS, WHEN READY FOR USE. CARE MUST BE USED WHEN MOVING IT OR
REPLACING ITS PARTS.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS LISTED BELOW COULD RESULT IN INJURY,
UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE.
• USE THE HANDLE TO MOVE THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM.
• BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR. LIMIT MOVEMENT TO A SLOW
CAREFUL WALK.
• DO NOT LET THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM STRIKE WALLS OR DOOR
FRAME.
• USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN
16 KG (35 LBS).

WARNING THE SYSTEM SHOULD ONLY BE MOVED WITH THE COCKPIT IN ITS CENTERED AND
LOCKED POSITION (IF EXISTS).

WARNING REMEMBER: IF THE FRONT CASTER SWIVEL LOCK IS ENGAGED FOR

TRANSPORTATION, PRESSING THE RELEASE PEDAL ONCE DISENGAGES THE
SWIVEL LOCK. YOU MUST DEPRESS THE RELEASE PEDAL A SECOND TIME TO
ENGAGE THE BRAKE.

CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY WHEN YOU MOVE THE COCKPIT AND THE ARM, DO NOT PUT YOUR FINGER,
HAND, OR OBJECT ON THE JOINT OF THE COCKPIT OR THE ARM.

CAUTION ENSURE THAT NO-ONE TOUCHES THE CONSOLE ARM/FROGLEG WHEN MOVING THE
OPERATOR PANEL.

CAUTION KEEP THE HEAT VENTING HOLES ON THE MONITOR UNOBSTRUCTED TO AVOID
OVERHEATING OF THE MONITOR.

CAUTION DO NOT TRANSPORT THE VENUE™ SYSTEM IN A VEHICLE WITHOUT LOCKING THE
-
CASTERS (WHEELS)

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

NOTICE SPECIAL CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN TRANSPORTING THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IN A
-
VEHICLE:
• BEFORE TRANSPORTING, PLACE THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IN ITS
SPECIAL STORAGE CASE.
• ENSURE THAT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS FIRMLY SECURED WHILE
INSIDE THE VEHICLE.
• SECURE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM WITH STRAPS OR AS DIRECTED
OTHERWISE TO PREVENT MOTION DURING TRANSPORT.
• PREVENT VIBRATION DAMAGE BY DRIVING CAUTIOUSLY. AVOID
UNPAVED ROADS, EXCESSIVE SPEEDS, AND ERRATIC STOPS OR
STARTS.
jh

WARNING EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD RESULT IF SPECIAL CARE IS NOT TAKEN WHEN
TRANSPORTING THE VENUE™ SYSTEM IN A VEHICLE.
ALWAYS:

• Eject any media from the media storage devices USB Flash Drive or other.
• Ensure that the cockpit is in locked position.
• Ensure that the Venue™ system is well prepared and packed in its original packaging before
transporting. Special care must be taken to correctly position the packing material, using all
screws and brackets.
For further information, refer to Chapter 3 -System Setup.
• Place the probes in their carrying case.
• Secure the system in an full down position and lock the wheels (brake).
• Ensure that the Venue™ system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle.
• Secure the system with straps or as directed otherwise to prevent motion during transport.
• Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds,
and erratic stops or starts.
CAUTION BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH ANY OF THE CABLES.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-4 Electrical Safety

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment must be connected to a well grounded power source. The
system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety grounding.

To ensure proper grounding, connect this equipment to a receptacle marked "HOSPITAL ONLY" OR
"HOSPITAL GRADE".

The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the
system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.

WARNING CONNECTING A VENUE™ SCANNER TO INCORRECT POWER LEVEL WILL DESTROY

THE SYSTEM!!
CONNECT THE SYSTEM ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE VOLTAGE INDICATED ON
THE PRODUCT LABEL.

WARNING SAFE PRACTICES:

FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES TO MINIMIZE SHOCK HAZARDS WHENEVER YOU ARE
USING THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM:
• TO MINIMIZE SHOCK HAZARD, THE EQUIPMENT CHASSIS MUST BE
CONNECTED TO AN ELECTRICAL GROUND.
• THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED WITH A THREE-CONDUCTOR AC
POWER CABLE. THIS MUST BE PLUGGED INTO AN APPROVED
ELECTRICAL OUTLET WITH SAFETY GROUND.
• THE POWER OUTLET USED FOR THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE
SHARED WITH OTHER TYPES OF EQUIPMENT.
• BOTH THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM POWER CABLE AND THE POWER
CONNECTOR MUST MEET INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL STANDARDS.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-4-1 Probes
All the probes for the Venue™ ultrasound unit are designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free,
reliable service. To ensure this, correct handling of probes is important and the following points should
be noted:

• Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may damage the transducer elements,
acoustic lens, or housing.
• Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. In this event, call your field service representative
immediately to obtain a replacement.
• Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged cable may compromise the
electrical safety of the probe.
• To avoid the risk of a probe accidentally falling, do not allow the probe cables to become entangled,
or to be caught in the system’s wheels.
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:

• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- housing
- cable strain relief
- lens
- seal
- connector pins
- locking mechanism
• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.

NOTE: For detailed information on handling endocavity probes, refer to the appropriate supplementary
instructions for each probe. In addition, refer to the Venue™ User Manual for detailed probe handling
instructions.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-4-2 Peripherals
1-4-4-2-1 Safety and Environmental Guidelines

WARNING Do not attempt to use different peripherals & accessories (brand and model connected
via USB ports) other than approved and provided by GE HealthCare! The Ultrasound
system is extremely sensitive and complex medical system. Any unauthorized
peripherals may cause failure or damage!

WARNING Environmental Dangers

ALL DEVICES MEETING IEC60950 MUST BE KEPT OUTSIDE THE PATIENT
ENVIRONMENT AS DEFINED IN IEC60601-1-1, UNLESS THE DEVICES, ACCORDING TO
IEC60601-1-1, ARE EQUIPPED WITH THE FOLLOWING:
A) ADDITIONAL FIXED EARTH PROTECTION
OR:
B) AN EXTRA ISOLATING TRANSFORMER

WARNING Commercial devices such as laser cameras, printers, VCRs and external monitors,
usually exceed allowable leakage current limits and, when plugged into separate
AC outlets, are in violation of patient safety standards. Suitable electrical isolation of
such external AC outlets, or the provision of extra protective earth for the device, is
required in order to meet UL60601-1 and IEC60601-1-1 standards for electrical leakage.
• Patient Vicinity UL 60601-1
Sub clause 2.12.20DV - D2 Addition
An area in which patients are normally cared for, the patient vicinity is the space with surfaces likely
to be in contact with the patient or attendant who can touch the patient. This encloses a space within
the room of 1.83 m (6 ft.) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental chair,
treatment booth, and the like) in its intended location, and extending vertically 2.29 m (7.5 ft.) above
the floor.
• Patient Environment IEC 60601-1-1
Sub clause 2.204
Such an area is an environment in which medical diagnosis, monitoring or treatment is carried out.
It is very difficult to attach unique dimensions to the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT. In practice a
distance of 2,5 m (8.2 ft.) above the floor on which the medical personnel stand and a horizontal
distance of 1,5 m (4.9 ft.) have justified themselves as indicative of the dimensions of the Patient

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Environment. The patient environment/vicinity is depicted as a dashed line in this procedure - see
the example in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Patient Safety Environment

• Patient Environment EN 60601-1
Sub clause 3.79 - Patient Environment
It is difficult for this standard to define dimensions for the volume in which diagnosis, monitoring or
treatment occurs. The dimensions for the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT given in Figure 1-2 have been
justified in practice.

Figure 1-2 Example of Patient Environment

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-5 Venue™ Battery Safety

NOTE: The Venue™ ultrasound scanner is supplied with two packs of lithium ion batteries in the battery bay.

The lithium ion batteries provide power for scanning, safely shutting down the system or placing it in
Standby mode, when an AC power source is interrupted or the AC power cable is disconnected from the
wall outlet. Lithium ion batteries last longer than conventional batteries and do not require replacement as
often. In Working mode, you can expect 4 hours of battery life with fully-charged batteries.

Used batteries should not be placed with common household waste products. Contact local authorities
for the location of a chemical waste collection program nearest you.

NOTE: Regulations vary for different countries. Dispose of a used battery in accordance with local regulations.

CAUTION USE ONLY BATTERIES APPROVED BY GE HealthCare AS SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE
VENUE™ ULTRASOUND SCANNER

WARNING The Venue™ battery is an approved UL device.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DIS-ASSEMBLE OR ALTER THE BATTERY!
Always observe the following precautions:
• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal objects.
• Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.
• Do not expose the battery to temperatures over 60o C (140o F). Keep the battery away from fire and
other heat sources.
• Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.
• Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
• Do not use a damaged battery.
• Do not apply solder to a battery.
• Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.

CAUTION TO PREVENT THE BATTERY BURSTING, IGNITING, OR FUMES FROM THE BATTERY CAUSING
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

• Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.

• Do not place the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.
• If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
• If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears abnormal during
use, or system storage, immediately remove it and stop using it.
• If you have any questions about the battery, consult your local GE HealthCare representative.

1-4-6 Patient Data Safety

WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,
YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A USB
FLASH DRIVE, EXTERNAL HDD, NETWORK STORAGE OR HARDCOPY BEFORE
DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-5
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS

EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING AND TESTING.

WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING VENUE™ SYSTEM, SOME
METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD
IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
EQUIPMENT IS NOT SUITABLE FOR USE IN THE PRESENCE OF A FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC
MIXTURE WITH AIR OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE.

DANGER DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, ONLY INSTALL GE
HealthCare APPROVED PARTS. DO NOT PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF
THE EQUIPMENT.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-6
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) Requirements
Follow Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the AC power plug at all
times during the service process.

To apply Lockout/Tagout (LOTO):

1. Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2. Shutdown the equipment.

3. Isolate the equipment.

4. Remove/disconnect the battery, if present.

5. Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.

6. Control all stored and residual energy.

7. Verify isolation.

All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

WARNING Energy Control and Power Lockout for Ultrasound System.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater
than 30 volts:
TAG

1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.

&
LOCKOUT

2. Turn off the breaker.

Signed Date

3. Unplug the Ultrasound system from the wall outlet, then from the Ultrasound System.
4. Maintain exclusive control of the Ultrasound system power cable.
5. Wait at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
6. Remove/disconnect the battery if present.

Ultrasound System components may be energized.

Capacitors on Ultrasound Systems with the Shearwave Option can take up to 5 minutes to
discharge.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-7
Product Labels and Icons
The Venue™ ultrasound scanner comes equipped with product labels and icons. These represent
pertinent information regarding the operation of the unit.

Note: All labels presented in this section are subject to change and should be used for reference only.

1-7-1 Universal Product Labels

NOTE: The following diagrams illustrate the labels found on the Venue™ ultrasound unit. For an explanation
of label icons and symbols, refer to Table 1-3

A system Rating Label (examples shown in Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4, below) is located at the rear of
the system. This indicates the ultrasound unit’s basic power compliance. In addition, a General Label
(Figure 1-7, below) provides details regarding regulatory compliance - as well as warnings and cautions.

Figure 1-3 Rating Label - Venue™ International

When Upgrading the software to R5, an electronic label will be displayed under the About tab in the
Config screen.

Figure 1-4 R5 upgrade Electronic label (eLabel)

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

If, the system was upgraded to R4 previously, an additional electronic label will be displayed in the
config screen:

If, the system was upgraded from R1 to R2 previously, an additional electronic label will be displayed
in the config screen:

Figure 1-5 Electronic label (eLabel) for R1 to R2 upgrade

If, the system was upgraded from R1/R2 to R3 previously, an additional electronic label will be displayed
in the config screen:

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 1-6 Electronic label (eLabel) for R1/R2 to R3 upgrade

Figure 1-7 General Label - International

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 1-8 Venue Warning Label

Figure 1-9 Stored Energy Hazard Label

1-7-2 Label Descriptions

The following table shows the labels and symbols that may be found on the Venue™ ultrasound unit,
and provides a description of each label’s purpose and location.
Table 1-3 Label Icons and Symbols - Description and Location

Label Name Description Location

Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol)

IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having a
floating applied part.
Probe connectors and
Provides additional safety precautions such as double
rating plate
insulation or reinforced insulation, because there is no
provision for protective earthing or reliance upon
installation conditions.

ATTENTION- General warning sign

Attention - Consult accompanying documents: alerts the Various
user to refer to the user documentation when complete
information cannot be provided on the label.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-3 Label Icons and Symbols - Description and Location (Continued)

Label Name Description Location

WARNING - Dangerous voltage

(the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral Various.
triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.

CE mark of conformity Rear of the system.

Read the Service Manual.

Intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual Rear of the system.
or other instructions when complete information cannot
be provided on the label.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

Disposal
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and
electronic equipment must not be disposed of as Rear of the system.
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately.
Please contact an authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.

Prescription Device Label United States only

Indicates compliance with TUV safety standards

IEC 60601-1 3.1 edition Medical Electrical Equipment, Rating Plate
part 1 General Requirement for Safety.
(USA and Canada).

Rating Plate
Model number
Probes

Rating Plate
Serial number
Probes

Rating Plate
The Month and Year of manufacture
Probes

Rating Plate
Manufacturer’s name and address Probes
Rear panel

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-3 Label Icons and Symbols - Description and Location (Continued)

Label Name Description Location

Authorized European Representative address

Indicates weight of the Venue™ ultrasound scanner. Various

CAUTION - Do not push the unit sideways when the

caster wheel brakes are in the locked position. Instability Rating Plate
may occur.

DO NOT place objects on the surface of the rear of the

Rating Plate
LCD Panel while folded.

"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for

connecting equipotential conductors when Peripherals.
interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.

Alternating current Various

“Protective Earth” indicates the protective earth Inside of AC adapter with system
(grounding) terminal Console

“ON” indicates the power on position of the power

switch. See the Console Overview section
in the User Manual, for location
CAUTION: This Power witch DOES NOT ISOLATE information.
Mains Supply.

Warning, crushing hazard: hand Rating Plate

How to lock Operator Panel and Monitor prior to

transport

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-3 Label Icons and Symbols - Description and Location (Continued)

Label Name Description Location

This symbol indicates that this electrical and electronic

product does not contain any hazardous substances
above the maximum concentration value established by
Bottom
the Chinese standard GB/T 26572, and can be recycled
after being discarded, and should not be casually
discarded

This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous

materials in excess of the limits established by the
Chinese standard GB/T 26572 Requirements of
concentration limits for certain restricted substances in
electrical and electronic products.
The number in the symbol is the Environment-friendly
Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the period during China Rating Plate
which the hazardous substances contained in electrical
and electronic products will not leak or mutate under
normal operating conditions so that the use of such
electrical and electronic products will not result in any
severe environment pollution, any bodily injury or
damage to any assets. The unit of the period is “Year”

Rear of the system.

GOST - R Mark

Rear of the system.

EAC mark

Brazil InMetro Symbol

GE HealthCare Logo

Type CF Defib-Proof Applied Part (heart in the box with on ECG module, near ECG
paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60878-02-06. patient cable connector

This device is delivered with Electronic Instructions for

Use (eIFU). This electronic IFU can be downloaded from
Rating plate or e-Label.
the Internet. A paper copy Instructions for Use can be
ordered at no additional cost.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-3 Label Icons and Symbols - Description and Location (Continued)

Label Name Description Location

Type/Class
Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Rear Panel.
Label

Purpose: identify the customs country of origin of the

material (x is a country name)
Note: When the Assembled in X statement is not shown
Assembled in X
on the label, this indicates that the Customs country of
origin is the same as the country of the legal
manufacturer.

Every system has a unique marking for identification, the

Unique Device Identification
(UDI) Label. The UDI label consists of a series of
alpha-numeric characters and barcode which uniquely Rating plate
identify the Venue system as a medical device
manufactured by General Electric. Scan or enter the UDI
information into the patient health record as required by
country-specific laws.

Batch code. Indicates the manufacturer’s batch code so

Rating plate or e-Label
that the batch or lot can be identified.

P/N Part Number Rating plate or e-Label

Type CF Defib-Proof Applied Part (heart in the box with on ECG module, near ECG patient
paddle) cable connector

Indication that the device is ‫ ש‬medical device General Label

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-7-3 Venue™ External Labels Location

In addition to the labels described in the previous section, an additional label may be found on the
Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in the following section.

Figure 1-1 Venue™ System - Configuration of Main Hardware Components

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-28

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-8
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GE HealthCare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior
to shipment. GE HealthCare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/
equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part
or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils
or an ultrasound probe).

The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.

NOTE: The USER/SERVICE staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local waste
disposal regulations

The Venue™ ultrasound scanner is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or
images. The user is responsible for the data on the Venue™ and a regular backup is highly
recommended.

If the Venue™ is sent for repair, ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased from the
Venue™ before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose patient data. GE
HealthCare is not responsible for the loss of this data.

If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE HealthCare employees for service
purposes, GE HealthCare will ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be
transferred by approved service processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or
encrypting data where required, and providing traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents
at each stage of the procedure while maintaining compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient
information transfers.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-9
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1-9-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due to interference from its environment
or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is
often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated
through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic
energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic
discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.

1-9-2 Compliance
The Venue™ ultrasound scanner conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and
to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power
line transient requirements.

NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh and clamps are in good
condition and installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted
in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-30

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1-9-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP CONNECTED TO THE
CAGE ASSEMBLY OR ANY GROUND SCREW WHENEVER YOU OPEN THE SYSTEM
FOR MAINTENANCE.
FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL
FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING
CONTACT.

WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING Venue™ , SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE.

1-9-4 General Caution

CAUTION Any changes to accessories, peripheral units or any other part of the system must be approved
by the manufacturer. Ignoring this advice may compromise the regulatory approvals obtained
for the product.

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-10
Customer Assistance
1-10-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not operate as indicated in this Service Manual or in the Venue™ User Manual,
or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support
resource, as listed below.

Prepare the following information before you call:

• Ultrasound System ID and/or serial number.

• Software version.
• Date and time of occurrence.
• Sequence of events leading to issue.
• Is the issue reproduceable?
• Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
• Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
• Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

Table 1-4 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance 1 of 2

LOCATION PHONE NUMBER

USA USCAN
GE HealthCare Service: On-site 1-800-437-1171
Ultrasound Service Engineering Service Parts 1-800-558-2040
3200 N Grandview Blvd OLC 1-800-321-7937 or 1-262-524-5300
Wauwatosa, WI 53188 Application Support 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698

1-800-321-7937
Canada OLC - USCAN
1-800-668-0732

LATAM
Latin America Service +1-262-524-5300
Application Support +1-262-524-5698

EMEA
GE Healthcare GmbH Hotline: +49 (0)211 7374-4789
Peter-Müller-Straße 24-26 +33 (0)1 3083-1300
40468 Düsseldorf Fax +49 (0)211 7374-4685
Germany

APAC Online Services Ultrasound Asia

ANZ Service Support 1800 647 855
Australia +(61) 1-800-659-465
Japan +(81) 42-648-2940
Korea +(82) 2-1544-6119
Singapore +(65) 6277-3444

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-32

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-4 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance (Continued) 2 of 2

LOCATION PHONE NUMBER

China Phone +(86) 800-810-8188
+(86) 400-812-8188
+(86) 10-6788-2652

India
Wipro GE Healthcare Pvt. Ltd. Phone +(91) 1-800-425-8025
4, Kadugodi Industrial Area +(91) 1-800-425-7255
Bangalore - 560 067 +(91) 1-800-102-7750
India

Table 1-5 Phone and Fax Numbers for Manufacturer

MANUFACTURER PHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER

GE HealthCare
Ultrasound Service Engineering
(1) 800-437-1171 (1) 414-721-3865
3200 N Grandview Blvd
Wauwatosa, WI 53188

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 2
Site Preparations
Section 2-1
Overview
2-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 2
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a Venue™
ultrasound unit. Included are descriptions of the electrical and facility requirements that must be met by
the purchaser. A worksheet is provided at the end of this chapter (see Figure 2-3) to help ensure that
all the required network information is available, prior to setup.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-2
Console Requirements
2-2-1 Unit Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements

Relative Humidity
Requirement Temperature (non-condensing) Air Pressure

Operational +10 — +40oC (50 — 104oF) 30 — 85% 700 — 1060 hPa

Storage -20 — +60oC (-4 — 140oF) 10 — 70% 700 — 1060 hPa

Transport -20 — +60oC (-4 — 140oF)) 10 — 70% 700— 1060 hPa

NOTE: The Venue™ system may be operated at an altitude of up to 3000 meters (9842 ft).

CAUTION IF THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN IN STORAGE OR HAS BEEN TRANSPORTED, PLEASE SEE THE
ACCLIMATION REQUIREMENTS BEFORE POWERING ON AND/OR USING THE SYSTEM.
Refer to the Setup Warnings section

NOTE: After a long period of storage, or after transportation of the system with the monitor in the folded-down
position (transportation mode), it is highly recommended to place the monitor in the upright position -
and to leave it in this position for a period of longer than 1 hour before use. This will enable it to properly
adjust to the environmental conditions.

2-2-2 Cooling Requirements

The cooling requirement for the Venue™ ultrasound unit environment is 2000 BTU/hr. This figure does
not include the cooling required for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.

NOTE: Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr demand on the environmental cooling.

2-2-3 Lighting Requirements

Bright light is needed for Ultrasound system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and
patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination
lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a
source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize
possible interference.

2-2-4 Time and Manpower Requirements.

CAUTION Two people are required to unpack the Venue™ ultrasound unit; at least two
people must be available to roll the system down the wheeling ramp. Attempts to
move the system considerable distances (or on an incline) by one person alone,
could result in personal injury, and/or damage to the system.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-5 Electrical Requirements

NOTE: GE HealthCare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the Ultrasound system.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size Ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size Ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the Ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

2-2-5-1 Venue™ Power Requirements

Electrical specifications for the Venue™ system are as follows:

Table 2-3 Electrical Requirements

Input Voltage Tolerances Op. Current Frequency

100V AC to 240V AC ±10% 500VA 50-60 Hz

2-2-5-2 Inrush Current

Inrush current is not a factor for consideration, due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power
supplies.
Inrush Current
Voltage
(Console Only)

100 V 4.5 A

240 V 2.3 A

2-2-5-3 Site Circuit Breaker

CAUTION Power outage may occur. The Ultrasound System requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid
circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you do not have any other
equipment operating on the same circuit.

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the Ultrasound system be readily accessible.

2-2-5-4 Site Power Outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without requiring the use of extension
cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment required to
support this unit must also be present and located within 1 m (3.2 ft) of the unit. Electrical installation
must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.

2-2-5-5 Mains Power Plug

The Venue™ portable ultrasound scanner is supplied with an AC power cable, as standard. In the event
that the unit arrives without a power cable, or a power cable fitted with an incorrect plug, contact your

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

GE HealthCare dealer. When necessary, the installation engineer will supply the appropriate power
plug to meet the applicable local regulations.

2-2-5-6 Power Stability Requirements

• Voltage drop-out
Max 10 msec
• Power Transients
The Venue™ is fully compliant with the following standard:
EN/IEC 60601-1-2 sections 36.202.1j, 7a(2).

2-2-6 EMI Limitations

Ultrasound systems are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The Venue™ system
complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.

NOTE: Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed, and should not be on the same
line as the ultrasound system. A dedicated line should be used for the ultrasound system.

Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of
these sources include:

• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave ovens
• light dimmers
• mobile phones
• in-house wireless phones (DECT phones)
• wireless computer keyboard and mouse
• air conditioning system
• High Frequency (HF) surgery equipment
• general AC/DC adapters
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-7 EMI Prevention/Abatement

The following table lists recommendations for preventing EMI::

Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/ Abatement

EMI Rule Details

• Keep the Ultrasound system at least 5 meters (15 feet) away from other EMI sources.
Be aware of Radio
• Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems
Frequency sources
caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.

Ground the Ultrasound Poor grounding is the most likely reason an Ultrasound system will have
system noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.

Replace all screws, Radio • After you finish repairing or updating the Ultrasound system, replace all covers and
Frequency gaskets, covers, tighten all screws.
cores • Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
• Install all covers. Loose or missing covers or Radio Frequency gaskets allow radio
frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.

If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on a Radio Frequency gasket are broken,
Replace broken Radio
replace the gasket. Do not turn on the Ultrasound system until any loose metallic part is
Frequency gaskets
removed.

Do not place labels where Where applicable, never place a label where Radio Frequency gaskets meet the
Radio Frequency gaskets Ultrasound system. Otherwise, the gap created will permit Radio Frequency leakage.
touch metal Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.

The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
Use GE HealthCare specified
Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is
harnesses and peripherals
specified.

Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones

Where applicable, do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out
Properly route peripheral
of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral
cables
bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.

2-2-8 Probe Environmental Requirements

2-2-8-1 Operation and storage temperatures for probe

For probe operation and storage temperature information, refer the the Ultrasound System or Probe
User Manual.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-9 Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin site preparation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks
before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.

WARNING FOR CONSOLE ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS AND FOR ULTRASOUND SYSTEMS

MOUNTED ON A DOCKING/ISOLATION CART, HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO
DELIVER AND UNPACK THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM.

CAUTION Attempts to move the Ultrasound system considerable distances or on an inclive

by one person, could result in injury or damage or both.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.

Purchaser responsibilities include:

• Procuring the materials required

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the Ultrasound system
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.

Note: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be
performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All
electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical
codes. The purchaser of GE HealthCare equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to
perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the Ultrasound system than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team.
To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group

performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).

The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the Ultrasound system. Carpet is not
recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic
interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact
Ultrasound system reliability.

To avoid delays during setup, the individual or team who will perform the setup should be notified at the
earliest possible date (preferably prior to setup), of the existence of any of the following variances:

• Use of any non-listed product(s).

• Use of any customer provided product(s).
• Placement of an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows.
The prepared site must be clean prior to delivery of the system. Carpeting is not recommended because
it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI should also be investigated before delivery.
Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-2 Required Facility Needs

• Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage, meeting all local and national codes,
which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the Ultrasound system’s proposed location
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide
• Proposed location for Ultrasound system is at least 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) from the wall for cooling
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the Ultrasound system to connect cables.
• Power outlets for other medical equipment
• Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of Ultrasound system
• Clean and protected space to store probes (in their cases or on a rack)
• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)

2-3-2-1 Desirable features

• Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide
• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
• Sink with hot and cold water
• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
• Emergency oxygen supply
• Storage for linens and equipment
• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE HealthCare for its software and proprietary manuals

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-2-2 Suggested Minimal Floor Plan

NOTE: GE HealthCare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the Ultrasound
system.

The Ultrasound system will function on voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power in North America, then a center tapped power source is required.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Scale:
Each square equals one square foot (app. 31 x 31 cm)

1. Door – at least 762 mm (30 inches) 8. Stool

2. Film Viewer 9. Ultrasound system

3. Counter Top, Sink with hot and cold water and 10. External Peripherals
Supplies Storage

4. Linen Supply 11. Dedicated Power Outlet -

Circuit Breaker protected and easily accessible

5. Probes/Supplies 12. Network Interface

6. Examination Table – 1930 x 610 mm (76 x 24 13. 457 mm (18 inches) distance of Ultrasound
inches) system from wall or objects

7. Footswitch 14. GE HealthCare Cabinet for Software and

Manuals

Figure 2-1 Minimal floor plan, 2.5 m x 3 m (8 by 10 foot)

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-2-3 Recommended Floor Plan

Scale:
Each square equals one square foot (app. 31 x 31 cm)

1. Secretaries or Doctors Desk 10. Dedicated Power Outlet - Circuit Breaker

protected and easily accessible

2. File Cabinet 11. Network Interface

3. Film Viewer 12. 457 mm (18 inches) distance of Ultrasound

system from wall or objects

4. Counter Top 13. Stool

5. Counter Top and Sink with hot and cold water 14. Footswitch

6. Overhead Lights Dimmer - Dual Level Lighting 15. Storage for Linens and Equipment
(bright and dim)

7. Emergency Oxygen 16. Examination Table – 1930 x 610 mm

(76 x 24 inches)

8. Suction Line 17. Lavatory and Dressing Room

9. Ultrasound system 18. Door – at least 762 mm (30 inches)

Figure 2-2 Recommended floor plan, 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot)

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-3 Networking Pre-Installation Requirements

2-3-3-1 Stand-alone Unit (without Network Connection)

None.

2-3-3-2 Unit Connected to Hospital’s Network

Supported networks:

• Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)

• 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet

2-3-3-3 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
DICOM servers for storage and to workstations for viewing images. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner enables viewing to be done on reviewing station, while scanning continues.

2-3-3-4 DICOM Option Pre-Installation Requirements

To configure the Venue™ ultrasound unit to work with other network connections, the network
administrator must provide the required information, which should include the following:

• Details: DICOM network details for the Venue™ unit, including the host
name, local port, IP address, AE title and network subnet mask.
• Routing Information: IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers in use at
the site.
• DICOM Application Information:Details of the DICOM devices in use at the site, including the
DICOM host name, AE title and IP addresses.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-4
Connectivity Installation Worksheet

Site System Information

Floor: Comments:
Site:

Dept: Room:

Type: REV:
Venue™ SN:

CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title Phone E-Mail Address

TCP/IP Settings

Scanner IP Settings
Name - AE Title:

IP Address:
Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

Services (Destination Devices)

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Figure 2-3 Connectivity Installation Worksheet

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-12
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Venue™
Host Name Local Port IP Address . . .

AE Title Net Mask . . .

ROUTING INFORMATION GATEWAY IP Addresses

Destination
IP Addresses Default . . .

ROUTER1 . . . . . .
ROUTER2 . . . . . .
ROUTER3 . . . . . .

DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION

NAME MAKE/REVISION AE TITLE IP ADDRESSES PORT

Store 1 . . .

Store 2 . . .

Store 3 . . .

Store 4 . . .

Store 5 . . .

Store 6 . . .

Work list . . .

Storage
. . .
Commit

MPPS . . .

Figure 2-4 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 2-5 Venue™ Pre-Setup Check List

Action Yes No

Schedule at least 2 hours for setup of the system.

Notify setup team of the existence of any variances from the basic setup.

Make sure system and probes have been subject to acclimation period.

Environmental cooling is sufficient.

Lighting is adjustable to adapt to varying operational conditions of the scanner.

Electrical facilities meet system requirements.

EMI precautions have been taken and all possible sources of interference have been
removed.

Mandatory site requirements have been met.

If a network is used, IP address has been set for the system and a dedicated network
outlet is available.

Chapter 2 - Site Preparations 2-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 3
System Setup
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter provides instructions for setting up the Venue™ ultrasound unit. Before beginning the
setup process, an appropriate site must be prepared, as described in Section 2-3 - Facility Needs. Once
the site has b3-1een prepared, setup can proceed as described in this chapter.
Included in this chapter are guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site, as well as procedures that
describe how to receive and unpack the equipment, and (if necessary) how to file a damage or loss
claim. Instructions for checking and testing the unit, probes, and external peripherals for electrical safety
are also provided.

NOTE: A Venue™ is ready for use only if the tests and checks described in Chapter 3 -System Setup
(this chapter) and Chapter 4 -General Procedures and Functional Checks of this Service
Manual meet the expected results.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-2
Setup Reminders
3-2-1 Average Setup Time
The Venue™ setup and functional checkout will take approximately one hour; Venue™ consoles with
optional equipment may take slightly longer.

Once the site has been prepared, the average installation time required is shown in Table 3-6 below.
Table 3-6 Average Setup Time

Average
Description Setup Time Comments

Unpacking the scanner 10 minutes

Setting up the scanner 10 minutes Time may vary, according to the required configuration

DICOM Option 10 minutes Time may vary, according to the required configuration
(connectivity)

InSite (RSVP) configuration 10 minutes

3-2-2 Setup Warnings

1.) The Venue™ ultrasound scanner weighs 63 Kgs (139 lbs), without add-ons/peripherals.
Two people are always required to unpack the system.
2.) There are no operator-serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. If problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel
should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.

NOTE: For information on shipping carton labels, refer to Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6.

3-2-2-1 System Acclimation Time

When unpacking the Ultrasound system, allow the temperature of the Ultrasound system to stabilize
before powering up. The following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures
from storage or transport temperatures.

CAUTION If the Ultrasound system is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance
to acclimate to its operating environment.

Following transport, the Venue™ system may be very cold, or hot. Allow time for the system to
acclimate before being switched ON. Acclimation requires 1 hour for each 2.5oC increment, when the
temperature of the system is below 10oC or above 40oC.

CAUTION Turning the system ON after arrival at the site - without allowing time for acclimation - may
cause system damage!
6

Table 3-7 Venue™ System Acclimation Time

°C -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 35 40 45 50 55 60

°F -40 -31 -22 -13 -4 5 14 23 32 41 50 95 104 113 122 131 140

Hrs 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 4 2 0 0 0 2 4 6 8

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-2-3 Safety Reminders

DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DO NOT TOUCH
THE UNIT!

WARNING TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO UNPACK THE SYSTEM AS IT IS HEAVY.

TWO PEOPLE ARE ALWAYS REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16KG (35 LB.)
OR MORE MUST BE LIFTED.

CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, CONNECT THE UNIT TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED

POWER OUTLET.
DO NOT USE A THREE-PRONG TO TWO-PRONG ADAPTER, AS THIS DEFEATS SAFETY
GROUNDING.

CAUTION DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST STRAP WHEN YOU WORK ON LIVE CIRCUITS WHERE MORE
THAN 30 V PEAK IS PRESENT.

CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE, TO ENSURE OPTIMAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING.
(WHEN COVERS ARE REMOVED, EMI MAY BE PRESENT).

WARNING ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE Venue™
PORTABLE ULTRASOUND SCANNER IS WITHIN AIUM/NEMA STANDARDS AND FDA
LIMITATIONS, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. ULTRASOUND ENERGY CAN
PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

NOTE: The Venue™ User Manual should be fully read and understood before operating the unit. Keep
the manual near the unit for reference.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
3-3-1 Warnings for Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the Ultrasound system because of its weight. Attempts to
move the Ultrasound system considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.

Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 KG (35 LBS) or more must be lifted

CAUTION Remember to use relevant personal protecting equipment (PPE) during packing and unpacking.
Check with your local EHS representative.

3-3-2 Overview
CAUTION Please read this section fully before unpacking the Venue™ ultrasound unit.

The Venue™ ultrasound unit, together with the peripherals, probes, cables, and accessories, are
shipped from the factory in a single shipping carton or wooden crate mounted on a raised wooden base
- see Figure 3-5.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-5 Shipping Carton- Venue™

Table 3-8 Shipping Carton - Dimensions and Weights

Description Height Width Depth Weighta

Venue™ scanner 160 cm 79 cm 77.5 cm 121 kgs
with peripherals and accessories 63 ins 31 ins 30.5 ins 267 lbs
a. Weight is approximate and will vary depending upon the supplied peripherals

Figure 3-6 Additional Labels on Shipping Carton

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-3-3 Unpacking the Shipping Carton

After completing a visual inspection of the shipping carton, proceed to the unpacking instructions below,
as appropriate.

NOTE: When using utility a knife to cut the nylon wrap take extra care not to scratch the system or any
peripheral.

1.) Cut the securing strips.

2.) Remove the nylon wrap from the lower part of the package to gain access to the accessories boxes.

Figure 3-7 Removing Nylon Wrap

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Remove the accessories boxes.

Probes
box #1
TV_TR tray

Additional
accessories
box

Small basket

Probes box #2
Probes boxes #3 and #4

Figure 3-8 Removing Accessories Boxes

4.) Remove the protective foams from the top of the system.

Figure 3-9 Removing Protective Foams

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Remove the wooden ramps and then remove the nylon wrap from the system.

Nylon wrap

Wooden ramps

Figure 3-10 Removing Nylon Wrap from the System

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Unlock the four butterfly locks and remove the two wooden brackets.

Wooden brackets

Butterfly locks

Figure 3-11 Removing Wooden Brackets

7.) Remove the silica gel bags.

Silica gel bags

Figure 3-12 Removing Silica Gel Bags

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-9
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Press down on the front locking brake to unlock the wheel. Repeat for the back wheel.
9.) Carefully roll the scanner forwards down the unloading ramp to remove it completely from the
shipping carton.

Figure 3-13 Removing Silica Gel Bags

10.)Make sure the system is standing firmly on the floor before applying the locking brake.
11.)Before commencing the installation procedure, follow the instructions for Remove the packing slip
(shipping consignment note) detailing the contents of the shipping carton and keep close to hand
ready to mark the check list - refer to Physical Inspection on page 3 - 11.Physical Inspection on
page 3 - 10.
12.)Remove the packing slip (shipping consignment note) detailing the contents of the shipping carton
and keep close to hand ready to mark the check list - refer to Physical Inspection on page 3 -
11.Physical Inspection

3-3-3-1 System Voltage Settings

WARNING CONNECTING A VENUE™ SCANNER TO INCORRECT VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY IT.
CONNECT THE SYSTEM ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE VOLTAGE INDICATED ON
THE PRODUCT LABEL.

3-3-4 EMI Protection

The Venue™ Ultrasound Unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro Magnetic
Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system
from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and
hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-10

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5 VSCAN Air HW integration kit installation procedure

3.3.5.1 Introduction
Overview

This document provides installation instruction for Vscan Air HW support kit.

Note: Vscan Air requires R5 SW version or higher.

Required Tools

Philips screwdriver

HW Prerequisites

APU backend

CFE gen2 front end

3.3.5.2 Upgrade kit contents

Table: Contents of System Package

Item name Description Picture

WiFi dongle USB 3.0 WiFi Adapter

(A8000)

BT adaptor
dongle

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Item name Description Picture

USB
connectors
of Venue BE
to WIFI and
BT cable

Including
scotches for
WIFI and BT

MPB to BEP
cable (Spilt
for charger)

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Item name Description Picture

Wireless
probe
charger

Tower label

cockpit
cables cover

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Item name Description Picture

Printer door
cover

Wireless
Probes SL /
CL
(purchased
separately)

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.3 Procedure Steps

The upgrade comprises the following major steps:

Step 1: Verify upgrade kit contents, see 3.3.5.4.1

Step 2: Backup data and system shutdown, see 3.3.5.4.2

Step 3: Replace system mains power cable (MPB to BE) by split cable, see 3.3.5.4.3

Step 4: Add cable for charger WIFI and BT (Bluetooth), see 3.3.5.4.4

Step 5: Return all system parts and close the system, see 3.3.5.4.5

Step 6: Install Wireless probe charger, see 3.3.5.4.6

Step 7: Verify system is functioning, see 3.3.5.4.7

Follow the installation steps to perform the HW installation procedure.

3.3.5.4 Installation Procedure

3.3.5.4.1 Step 1: Check upgrade kit contents

Open Venue package and verify all parts are present, according to Table: Contents of System Package

3.3.5.4.2 Step 2: Backup Data and System Shutdown

Perform the following steps before starting the upgrade procedure:

1. Backup all patient data

2. Perform full system shutdown

3. Disconnect system cable at the back side of the system, and remove the cable cover from the cart pole cable
rail by pinching

Switch power OFF

Plug-out the system

mains power cable

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.3 Step 3: Replace System Power (MPB to BE PWR) Cable

Replace the system mains power BEP cable by the new Y-splitter cable, to provide power to the charger.

To replace the Power (MPB to BE PWR) Cable, follow these steps:

1. Remove accessories, basket, covers, batteries, PSU, MPB, inner cable door, see 3.3.5.4.3.1

2. Disconnect and remove current Power Cable (MPB to BE PWR), see 3.3.5.4.3.2

3. Install the new split Power (MPB to BE PWR) Cable, see 3.3.5.4.3.3

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.3.1 Remove accessories, covers, batteries, PSU, MPB, inner cable door
1. Remove all system accessories

2. Remove basket: Pull the basket upwards and remove it as shown below

3. RS Probe Cover: Grip the RS Probe Cover on the recess on its bottom and gently pull it towards you to
disconnect it from the holding magnets. Then slide the cover down to remove it

Remove RS
Probe Cover

4. Remove Lower Front eTower Cover: Grip the recess at the center of the cover, and pull the lower front
eTower cover out towards you

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Remove Lower Front eTower cover

5. Remove MPB Front Metal Door: Release four captive screws and remove the MPB Front Metal Door

Release four captive screws and remove MPB door

6. Remove Left & Right Side eTower Covers: Grip the rubber holder and pull the cover toward you to remove it
from the system. Repeat for both sides.

Remove Side eTower Covers

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Remove the MPB (batteries) door cover: open 4 captive screws (two on each side). Then grip the MPB door
cover at the bottom and pull toward you to remove it

Release captive Release captive

screws at both sides screws at both sides

8. Open FE (Front End) door assembly: Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly
and loosen the captive screw. Then, carefully open the door

Open FE door

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9. Remove the batteries: Release the two captive screws securing each battery pack. Then pull out the top and
bottom battery packs

Remove battery packs

10. Remove PSU: Release the captive screw at the bottom of the PSU and pull the PSU out gently

Remove PSU Module

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11. Remove MPB:

a. Release two captive screws at the bottom center and top center of the MPB

Remove MPB Module:

release captive screws

b. Release two captive screws at the bottom center and top center of the MPB

Remove MPB Module

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.3.2 Disconnect and remove current power cable

1. Disconnect the two lower cable connectors J4, J5 by sliding them upwards and pushing them inwards (see J-
connectors below).

J-Connectors map

Disconnect Two Lower Connectors

2. Slide cable upwards to release it from the two plastic cable clips

Release Cable from Plastic Cable Clips

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Pull the cable from the back

4. Carefully raise the arm to its up position and remove the arm base cover.

Raise arm and remove base cover

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5. Remove the side cover on the side of the thin cables: Using Allen key/Philips screwdriver, remove the side
screw of the arm side cover.

Open thin
cable side

6. Open plastic clips on side of chassis

7. Remove existing cockpit cables cover door located at top of chassis, by opening the thumb-screw and sliding
the plate outwards

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.3.3 Insert and connect new (split) cable

1. Locate the new MPB to BE PWR cable, with split for wireless charger:

New MPB to BE PWR

cable, with split for
wireless charger

2. Insert the split cable through the (removed) cockpit cables cover door

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Install the new cockpit cables cover door (with extra hole for the split cable), and fasten the thumb-screw

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Route the new split cable through 3 plastic clips.

Route new split cable

through plastic clips
and replaced cover

5. Route the cable through the replaced cockpit cables cover door and cover the cable with rubber grommet.

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Route the cable towards the probe charger position as follows:

a. Remove base plastic cover

Remove base
plastic cover

b. Remove the left side plastic cover using appropriate Allen

Open Allen
screw and
remove left side
cover

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Route the charger cable through the exposed hole and the side, and direct it towadrs the right side
of the system

Route charger
cable through
hole and
through left side

NOTE: ensure there is enough cable length to position the charger cable edge in its dedicated position, as
shown in the following figure:

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

d. Return the side plastic cover and secure with the Allen screwdriver, and place the plastic cover on
top.

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Connect the probe charger on the left side of the system (see 3.3.5.4.6 for details)

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.4 Step 4: Add cable for charger WIFI and BT (Bluetooth)

The following are the High-level steps for installing new WIFI and BT cable:

1. Prepare for cable installation (remove front cover, place label, replace printer door cover) see 3.3.5.4.4.1

2. Install BE/WIFI cable and connect BT, WIFI, see 3.3.5.4.4.2

3.3.5.4.4.1 Prepare for BT and WIFI cable installation

1. Remove eTower Front Cover: Remove the Upper eTower Cover (corresponding to your system configuration:
with/without printer).

2. Remove the cover off the tower label, and position the tower label:

Place the sticker on the tower

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Apply one side of the scotches for WIFI and BT on the tower as illustrated below;

NOTE: The other side of each scotch will be applied on the relevant elements to be connected, see 3.3.5.4.4.2

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Remove printer door by unscrewing captive screw, and replace it by the new printer door cover

Replace
printer door
cover

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.4.2 Install BE/WIFI extension cable and connect BT and WIFI

1. Locate the new BT WIFI cable

Towards
Sticker: attach BackEnd
to tower

BT, WIFI connectors

2. Route the BT/WIFI cable through the replaced printer door cover, and cover the cable with rubber grommet.

NOTE: If ECG/printer are installed in your configuration, route their cables through the new cover and cover
with rubber grommets on these cables too.
3. Route the new BT/WIFI cable previously inserted through the printer door cover, through the tower front
towards the BE (Back End) module, and connect it to the dedicated (yellow) connector

Yellow
connector for
BT/WIFI cable

NOTE: Reaching the connector may be easier by removing the BE unit. If needed – remove the BE module;
Insert the cable to the yellow connector, and then return the BE module to the cart.

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Attach the cable WIFI and BT connectors to the tower, according to the label previously attached to chassis;
then attach the cable edges (connectors) to the scotches

Attach cable edges

using the scotch
Attach BT Connect BT
connector dongle to
extension
cable

Connect Netgear
WIFI dongle to
Attach WIFI extension cable
connector WIFI connector

5. Connect Netgear WIFI dongle to extension cable.

6. Connect BT dongle to extension cable

3.3.5.4.5 Step 5: Return all system parts and Close the system
Return all the system parts:

1. Close arm side and base covers (removed in 3.3.5.4.3.2)

2. Return the MPB module, PSU module, batteries (removed in 3.3.5.4.3.1)

3. Close the covers: MPB door, Side eTower Covers, front eTower Cover, RS Probe Cover, accessories (removed
in 3.3.5.4.3.1)

4. Close front cover and return the basket (removed in 3.3.5.4.4.1, 3.3.5.4.3.1)

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3.5.4.6 Step 6: Install Wireless Probe Charger

1. Position and Mount probe charger on top of cockpit and turn the bottom locking leaver to tighten, as shown

2. Position the charger cable female-side sticker on the system’s back-side, at the height as shown

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Connect the charger cable male-side to the female, and twist to lock, as shown

4. Verify wireless probe charging.

3.3.5.4.7 Step 7: System Verification

After completing the installation steps, verify the following system items are functioning properly:

1. Probe charging and pairing.

Your system is now ready, Enjoy!

Chapter 3 - System Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-4
Preparing for Setup
3-4-1 Verifying Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.

3-4-2 Physical Inspection

Verify that the Venue™ arrived intact (visual inspection).

If the Venue™ has been damaged, please refer to DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION on page xiv in the
beginning of this manual.

3-4-3 Component Inspection

After verifying that all the required parts are included in the shipping crate, inspect the system components
using the checklist supplied below. In addition, ensure that all the labels described in Chapter 1 -
Introduction are present, accurate and in good condition, and enter the serial number printed on the main
label into the system installation details card, as described in Paperwork After Setup on page 3-79.

3-4-3-1 Damage Inspection Checklist

Visually inspect the contents of the shipping carton for damage. If any parts are damaged or missing,
contact an authorized GE HealthCare Service Representative.

A Damage Inspection Checklist for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner is provided in Table 3-9 below.
Table 3-9 Damage Inspection Checklist - Venue™ Systems

 Step Item Recommended Procedure

1 Console Verify that the system is switched OFF and unplugged. Clean the console.

Check all probes for wear and tear on the lens, cable, and connector. Look for bent
or damaged pins on the connector and in the connector socket on the unit. Verify
2 Probes
that the EMI fingers around the probe connector socket housing are intact. Check
the probe locking mechanism and probe switch.

Clean the Cockpit (monitor) by gently wiping with a dry, soft, lint-free non-abrasive
3 Cockpit (Monitor)
folded cloth. Inspect the screen surface for scratches and raster burn.

4 Fans Turn on the system and verify that the system’s cooling fans are operating.

Check the rear panel connectors for bent pins, loose connections and loose or
5 Rear Panel missing hardware. Screw all the cable connectors tightly to the connector sockets
on the panel. Verify that the labeling is in good condition.

6 Covers Check that there are no dents or scratches and that no internal parts are exposed.

Check and clean the peripherals in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
7 Peripherals To prevent EMI or system overheating, dress the peripheral cables inside the
peripheral cover.

Check the power cord for cuts, loose hardware, tire marks, exposed insulation, or
8 Power Cord
any deterioration. Verify continuity.

9 Casters Visually check the casters for damages and for proper movement.

Check that the swivel and full lock castors can roll and swivel, and can be placed
Swivel and Full in the locked position by pressing the foot brake (lower lever) down on each.
10
Lock Castors Ensure that the wheels are locked, unable to swivel left or right, and that there is
no movement forwards or backwards.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-4-3-2 Front View of the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit

3 3

4 5

Figure 3-14 Front View of the Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner

# Item
Cockpit (monitor):
1
Tilts up and down and swivels left and right.
2 eTower:
3 Basket holders
Caster:
4
(1x front) with free movement and no locking.
Swivel and full lock caster:
5
(1x front)
6 Front Handle
7 Auxiliary monitor

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-4-3-3 Rear View of the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit

15

14

13
1

12

11

6 10

9
4 5
8

Figure 3-15 Venue™ Rear View

# Item # Item
1 Cockpit (monitor) - rear 9 System Label - General Label International
Rear handle: used to pull/push the scanner and place it in
2 10 On/Off Switch Cover
the desired position.
Interface Panel:
3 Probe locking levers 11 Provides ports for LAN, Insulated USB and Dual USB (see
Figure 3-16).
Caster:
4 12 Probe Connectors - for 4 RS probes
(1x back) with free movement and no locking.
Swivel and full lock caster:
5 13 Articulated Arm
(1x back)
6 Power inlet connector 14 Probe holders
Gel Cup Holder: Provides convenient storage for US Gel
7 System Base 15
bottle.
8 System Label - Rating Plate

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-4-3-4 Peripheral/Accessory Interface Panel

Figure 3-16 shows a view of the Venue™ ultrasound unit rear panel showing external peripheral/
accessory connectors.

1 2

Figure 3-16 View of the Venue™ Peripheral/Accessory Interface Panel

1 Ethernet LAN connector — 1000 Base-TX Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (3kV insulation)
2 Dual USB 3.0 connector (not insulated)
3 HDMI connector (not insulated)

3-4-4 EMI Protection

The Venue™ has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many
of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the Venue™ from image artifacts
caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed
and secured before the Venue™ is put into operation.

See EMI Limitations on page 2 - 4 for more information about EMI protection.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-5
Completing the Setup
3-5-1 Purpose of this Section
This section describes how to complete the setup of the Venue™.

3-5-2 System Specifications

3-5-2-1 System Requirements Verification

• Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in Chapter 2.
(See: Facility Needs on page 2 - 7.)
• Verify that the specifications below do not conflict with any on-site conditions.

3-5-2-2 Physical Dimensions

Table 3-10 Physical Dimensions of Venue™ with Monitor and Peripherals

in Transportation Position

Height Width Depth Unit

131 48 72.5 cm

51.57 18.89 28.54 Inches

3-5-2-3 Mass with Monitor and Peripherals

Table 3-11 Mass of Venue™ with Cockpit (monitor), without Probes and Peripherals

Model Mass [KG] Mass [LBS]

Venue™ 63 139

3-5-2-4 Acoustic Noise Level

Less than 55 dB(A) at 20 degrees Celsius, measured in the operators head position, 20 cm in front of
the keyboard’s right corner, at 1.30 m above the floor, and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides, 1
meter above the floor.

3-5-3 Electrical Specifications

WARNING Connecting a Venue™ to the wrong voltage level will most

likely destroy it.

3-5-3-1 Verification of the Venue™ Voltage Setting

Verify that the mains voltage specified for the Venue™ is available on-site.

The voltage setting for the Venue™ is found on a label near the Mains Power Circuit Breaker on the
rear of the Venue™ .

3-5-3-2 Electrical Specifications for the Venue™

In the table below, the electrical specifications for Venue™ includes monitor and on board peripherals.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-12 Electrical Specifications for all Venue™ Models

Voltage 100-240 VAC ±10%

Power Consumption 500 VA

Frequency 50-60 Hz

The current drain will vary depending on the mains voltage.

• At 240 VAC the current may be up to 2.08 A.

• At 100 VAC the current may be up to 5 A.

3-5-4 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel

NOTE: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according to the
respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical
equipment). Furthermore, all complete configurations shall comply with the valid version of the system
standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal
output part of Venue™ , configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the Ultrasound
system complies with the requirements of the valid version of IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the
technical service department or your local representative for GE HealthCare.

3-5-4-1 Connect Ethernet

Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector on the External I/O.

The connector is located on the rear side of Venue™ .

3-5-4-2 Connect USB Flash Card

Insert the USB Flash Card in one of the USB ports on the Venue™ .

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-5-5 Connecting Probes

3-5-5-1 Introduction to Connecting Probes

Probes can be connected or changed any time, as described below, regardless of whether the system
is powered ON or OFF.

The Venue™ has four RS connectors.

Figure 3-17 Probe Connectors on Venue™ Front End Door

CAUTION HANDLE THE PROBE GENTLY WHILE CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING.

DO NOT TOUCH THE PATIENT AND ANY OF THE CONNECTORS ON THE ULTRASOUND UNIT
SIMULTANEOUSLY, INCLUDING ULTRASOUND PROBE CONNECTORS.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-5-5-2 Connect a Probe

NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe.

CAUTION Do not allow the probe head to hang freely. Excessive impact
to the probe will result in irreparable damage.

CAUTION To prevent probe connector pins damage, or PCB board

damage, do not use excessive force when connecting the
probes.

CAUTION Keep the probe cables away from the wheels.

Do not bend the probe cables.
Do not cross cables between probes.

There are 4 probe connectors on the rear panel of the system, numbered 1 through 4. Each connector
is comprised of a probe-socket (6) and a locking latch (5).

Figure 3-18 Venue™ Probe Connectors

1) Before connecting the probe:
a.) Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets.
b.) Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe pins.
c.) Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

To connect a probe to one of the upper sockets 1, 2, or 3:

1) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
2.) Prior to inserting the probe, ensure that the connector locking handle is positioned to the left.
3) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
4) Push the connector locking handle to the right to secure the probe connector.
5) Carefully position the probe cord so it is free to move and is not resting on the floor.
To connect a probe to one of the lower socket 4

1) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing downward.
2.) Prior to inserting the probe, ensure that the connector locking handle is positioned to the right
3) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
4) Push the connector locking handle to the left to secure the probe connector.
5) Carefully position the probe cord so it is free to move and is not resting on the floor.

3-5-5-3 Disconnect Probes

Follow these steps to disconnect the RS probes, as applicable:

1) Move the connector locking lever to the left to unlock the connector (For lower socket 4, move the
connector locking lever to the right)
2) Carefully remove the connector from the port.
3) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case.
For cleaning instructions, see the User Manual.

3-5-5-4 Connect a wireless probe - Pairing Probe Procedure

To pair a probe, refer to the instructions described in Options Setup on page 3 - 68.

3-5-6 Power on/Boot up

For procedure, see: Power ON/Boot-up on page 4 - 3.

3-5-7 Power Shut Down

For procedure, see: Power Shutdown on page 4 - 6.

3-5-8 Complete Power Down

For procedure, see: Complete Power Down on page 3 - 19.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-6
Configuration
3-6-1 Purpose of this Section
This section describes how to configure the Venue™ .

3-6-2 Venue™ Configuration

3-6-2-1 EZ Config - Setup Wizard

The Venue™ Configuration Wizard enables the user to easily configure the system, after SW
installation.

1.) After the system reboots, the Venue™ setup wizard welcome screen appears:
2.) Select the interface language and tap OK to proceed.

Figure 3-19 Venue™ EZ Config- Welcome Screen

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Tap Run wizard to continue the installation.

Figure 3-20 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Run Wizard

The settings screen appears. The Local tab opens by default.

4.) Wait while system initializes the setup wizard.

Note: The initialization duration might take up to 15 minutes, due to automatic firmware updates.

Figure 3-21 Venue™ Setup Wizard - Initialization

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) On the Local tab, enter the required details and tap Save. Then, proceed to the next tab.

Figure 3-22 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Local Tab

6.) On the Network tab, define the required settings and tap Save.Then, proceed to the next tab.

Figure 3-23 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Network Tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) On the Thermal Printer tab, configure the printer and tap Save. Then, proceed to the next tab. If
the printer is already configured, skip this step and proceed to the next one .

Figure 3-24 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Thermal Printer Tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) On the InSite tab, define the required settings and tap Submit Changes.
Make sure you fill the CRM No. Field as appears in the CRM system.
If there is a proxy, check the checkbox and fill in the proxy IP and port.

Figure 3-25 Venue™ Installation Wizard - InSite Tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) On the Connectivity tab, enable the required settings in the Connectivity items list, by moving the
On/Off sliders to On. Then, select each Connectivity item to define its properties. Tap Apply and
then Save.Then, proceed to the next tab.

Figure 3-26 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Connectivity Tab

10.)On the OptionKey tab, enter the key string to enable the purchased options and tap Save. Then,
proceed to the next tab.

Figure 3-27 Venue™ Installation Wizard - OptionKey Tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

11.)On the Reports tab, view the defined settings and tap Save As to save the report. Save the report
on USB flash memory.Then, proceed to the next tab.

Figure 3-28 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Report Tab

12.)On the About tab, view all settings defined on each tab, and click Save to save the entire set of
defined settings. Then click Exit, to exit the Setup Wizard.

Figure 3-29 Venue™ Installation Wizard - About Tab

NOTE: To reinitialize the EZ Config wizard, access the Service tab under the System Configuration menu (refer
to Open Service Screen on page 3 - 34).

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-2-2 Accessing System Configuration Settings

All settings configured by the EZ Config wizard can be modified via System Configuration Settings. To
access these settings, perform the following steps:

1) On the Home screen tap: Settings >> Config.

Figure 3-30 Settings Menu

2) Log on as ADM.

Figure 3-31 Operator Login

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3) From the Config side menu, select System >>Settings

The System Settings screen is displayed.

Figure 3-32 System Settings

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-28

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-2-3 Enter Location

Figure 3-33 Enter Location

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-13 Enter Location

STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S)

1. Select the Hospital field and type After restart:
the name of the hospital (max 64
• The 24 first characters of this
characters).
name are displayed on the
scanning screen’s title bar.
• All 64 are displayed on the
image properties on saved
images.
2. Select the Department field and After restart:
type the name of the department
• This name will be displayed on
(max 64 characters).
the image properties on saved
images
3. Select the Echolab field and type After restart:
the name.
• This name will be displayed on
the image properties on saved
images

3-6-2-4 Adjust Date and Time

1 2
3

4 5

1. Date 4. Date Format

2. Time 5. Default Century
3. Time Format

Figure 3-34 Date and Time Adjustments

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-30
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-14 Date and Time Adjustments

STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S)

1. • Open the System The Settings window is displayed.
(Configuration) Window,
• Select Settings, if needed.
2. Select the preferred Date Format, • EU: the European/International
see (d) in Figure 3-19. “DD.MM.YYYY” format is used
• DD = Date (two digits) • US: the American
“MM.DD.YYYY” format is used
• MM = Month (two digits)
• YYYY = Year (four digits)
3. Select the preferred Time Format, • 24: the 24 hour format is used
see (3) in the figure. • 12: the 12 AM/PM hour format
is used
4. Adjust the date, see (1) in the New date is displayed
figure.
5. Adjust the time, see (2) in the New time is displayed
figure.
6. Select Default Century (1900, • 1900:
2000 or None), see (5) in the figure. • the number 19 is automatically
displayed when entering the year in the
patient date of birth.
• To edit century, press BACKSPACE
twice.
• 2000:
• the number 20 is automatically
displayed when entering the year in the
patient date of birth.
• To edit century, press BACKSPACE
twice.
• None:
• the four digits have to be typed when
entering the year in the patient date of
birth.
• The selected setting will be used as
soon as the unit has been restarted.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-2-5 Select Language for User Interface and Online Manuals

1 2

3 4

Figure 3-35 Select Language, Units and Controls Sound

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-32

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-15 Select Language for User Interface and Online Manuals

STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S)

1. From the Settings screen, select The selected language will be used
the preferred User Interface as soon as the unit has been
language from the Language restarted.
pulldown menu (1).
2. Use the Input Language pulldown The selected language for
menu (2) to select the preferred character set will be used as soon
language for the character set. as the unit has been restarted.
3. Use the Manual Language pulldown The selected language will be used
menu (3) to select the preferred as soon as the unit has been
language for the online manual. restarted.
4. Select the Secondary check box to The selected language will be used
enable the multi language keyboard as soon as the unit has been
characters support. restarted.
Then, from the pulldown menu,
select the required language.

5. See Table 3-16 on page 3-33 See Table 3-16 on page 3-33
6. See Table 3-16 on page 3-33 See Table 3-16 on page 3-33

3-6-2-6 Select Units of Measure and Controls Sound

Table 3-16 Select Units of Measure and Controls Sound

STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S)

1. In the Settings window, use the The selected units (Metric or US)
Units pull down menu (3 in Figure will be used for measurements as
3-35) to select Metric or US Units. soon as the unit has been restarted.
2. Select the Mute check box if you The controls sound will be muted.
wish to mute the controls sound
(4 in Figure 3-35.)

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-3 Service Screen Setup

3-6-3-1 Open Service Screen

1) Log on as ADM.
2) From the Config side menu, select Service to view the Service Screen.

Figure 3-36 Service Screen

3-6-3-1-1 SW Recovery
In cases of abnormal system behavior, as a part of troubleshooting process, it is recommended to
reload the system software. To reload the software without affecting patient data, tap the SW Recovery
button on the Service screen and follow the displayed instructions (SW installation media is not required
for this process).

3-6-3-1-2 Re-initiate EZ-Config Wizard

The EZ-Config wizard can be initiated on demand. To re-initiate the EZ-Config wizard, tap the Start EZ-
Config Wizard button on the Service screen.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-34

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-4 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection

3-6-4-1 Approved Internal Peripherals

This list covers the internal peripherals available for Venue™ :

• Monochrome (Black and White) Digital Sony UP_D711MD printer

• ECG Module

3-6-4-2 Approved External Peripherals

One of the external units listed below, may be connected to the USB port on the rear of the
Venue™ :

3-6-4-3 External Peripherals for Connection to USB

• External Data Storage: USB Flash Card
• Barcode reader
• Wi-Fi USB adapter

3-6-5 Software Options Configuration

3-6-5-1 Software Option Introduction

A Software Option Key, an alphanumeric text string, enables a software option or a combination of
software options.

The Software Option Key is specific for each unit.

NOTE: There may be more than one Software Option Key in use, depending on the installed options.

3-6-5-2 To Install a Software Option

Follow these steps to install the Software Option Key:

1) Log on as adm.
2) Select Admin (lower part of window).
3) Select the System Admin tab.
4) Select New to open the New Key dialog where you type the SW Option Key.

CAUTION Incorrect Software Option Key entry will result in loss of

Ultrasound system options. If Software Option Key is
incorrect, please contact your local GE HealthCare Service
Representative or the Online Center.
5) Type the Software Option Key.
You must include the dashes (-) as they are part of the Software Option Key.
6) Press Save to save the new setting.
7) Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far.

3-6-5-3 Remote Check and Configurations

Contact the Online Center for InSite checkout.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-35

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-7
Connectivity Overview
3-7-1 Physical Connection
There are several possible connection methods, as outlined below.

3-7-2 Stand-alone Venue™

No network connection needed.

3-7-3 Wireless Connection from Venue™ to DICOM Server

Wireless network adapter must be connected to the Venue™ system in order to enable wireless
network connection.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-36

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-8
Connectivity Setup
NOTE: If connected to a stand-alone network (Peer-to-Peer network with a Venue™ scanner, and an optional
network printer), you should use default delivery settings.

3-8-1 Introduction
To be able to use the network functions when connected to a hospital network, the Venue™ must have
a proper network address.

• Before you can set up the Venue™ , you need to collect some information.
• The Worksheet (see sample Connectivity Installation Worksheet on page 2 - 12) can be used for
gathering this information.
• Typical source for this information is the network administrator.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-37

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-2 Select TCP/IP Screen

1. Log on as adm.
2. Tap: Settings >> Config >> Connectivity >> TCP/IP.
The resulting screen gives you an overview of many of the network settings for Venue™ .

1 2

5 6 7 8

9 10 11

1. My Computer: 5. Manage Certificates

• Computer Name: Allows you to Install/Uninstall certificates.
VEC-XXXXXX, where “XXXXXX” is a number. 6. Setup Profile:
• AE Title: Allows you to manually setup a new network
Venue™ connection profile.
• Port No: 7. Profiles
Default port number: 104 Allows you to edit or delete existing network
2. Server Config: connection profiles.
• Servers: 8. Connect
List of servers Displays a list of available wireless networks.
• Buttons: 9. Save Settings:
Use the buttons to Add, Modify or Remove Select Save Settings to archive any changes
servers. you have done to the TCP/IP settings.
3. Remote Path 10. Network Settings:
Used for Save As, Export from Q-Analysis, and Use Network Settings if you need to change
for exporting Error Logs with Alt-D. Venue™ ’s IP settings or turn DHCP on or off.
4. Configurable Remote Path User: 11. MAC Addresses:
Add Secondary Log-in Credential. Displays the Network interface cards MAC
addresses.

Figure 3-37 TCP/IP Overview Screen for Venue™

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-38

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-3 Finding the system network MAC (Physical) addresses

The system allows the user to connect to the network in 2 ways:

• Wired connection - connecting the system to the network using a RJ45 network cable.
• Wireless connection - this is an optional feature, providing wireless network interface to the hospital
network.
Each network interface has a unique physical address that is somtimes required by the network
administrator to allow connection to the hospital network.

To find the MAC address:

1.) Open Settings -> Config -> Connectivity.

2.) Select TCP/IP tab.
3.) tap on MAC ADDRESSES.

Figure 3-38 MAC address Button

Figure 3-39 MAC addresses

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-39

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-4 Set up Wireless connection (For broadcasting SSID networks)

1.) From the Config -> Connectivity -> TcpIp tab, tap ’Connect’
2.) Tap on the network name you want to connect to and enter the network key and tap Connect.

Figure 3-40 Network connections

3.) If the network key is correct, the status will change to Connected.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-40

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-5 Setting Up Non-Broadcasting (Hidden) Wireless Network Connection

1.) Log on as adm.
2.) Tap: Settings >> Config >> Connectivity >> TCPIP.
3.) Tap the Network Settings button.
The Network Connections window opens.
4.) Open the Control Panel and go to Network and Internet -> Network and Sharing Center.
5.) Click or tap the following link: Set up a new connection or network.

Figure 3-41 Set Up a New Connection or Network

The Set Up a Connection or Network wizard is started.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-41

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Select Manually connect to a wireless network and click or tap Next.

Figure 3-42 Choosing a Connection Option

7.) Enter the security information for your WiFi network in the appropriate fields, as follows:
• In the Network name field, enter the SSID or the name of the network.
• In the Security type field, select the type of security used by the hidden wireless network.
Some routers may name this authentication method. Depending on the security type you select,
Windows 10 may or may not ask you to also specify an encryption type.
• In the Security key field, enter the password used by the hidden WiFi.
• If you do not want others to see the password you type, select the Hide characters check box.
• To connect to this network automatically, select the Start this connection automatically
check box.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-42

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Click Next to proceed.

Figure 3-43 Entering Security Information

9.) If you check the box that says “Connect even if the network is not broadcasting,” Windows 10
searches for the hidden network every time it is not connected to a network, even if the hidden
network is not in your area. This may put your privacy at risk because skilled professionals can
intercept this search for the hidden network.

NOTE: If you select the Connect even if the network is not broadcasting check box, Windows 10 searches
for the hidden network every time it is not connected to a network, even if the hidden network is not in
your area. This may put your privacy at risk because skilled professionals can intercept this search for
the hidden network.

10.)Windows 10 notifies you that it has successfully added the wireless network. Click or tap Close to

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-43

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

complete the setup.

Figure 3-44 Entering Security Information

If you are in the range of the hidden WiFi, your Windows 10 device automatically connects to it.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-44

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-6 Network Proxy/DNS/WINS configuration

3-8-6-1 Proxy setup

1.) Open Config -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP tab.
2.) Tap Network Settings.

3.) Tap the up arrow located on the left side of the address bar

4.) Tap Internet Options

5.) Select > Connections -> LAN settings

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-45

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Check the Use a Proxy server

7.) Tap OK and OK and reboot the system.

3-8-6-2 DNS/WINS setup

1.) Open Config -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP tab.
2.) Tap Network settings
3.) Double Tap on the connected network adapter.
4.) Tap Internet Protocol Version (TCP/IPv4)
5.) Tap Properties
6.) Tap Advanced
7.) Select WINS or DNS tab.
8.) Fill in the server IP address
9.) Tap Add
10.)Tap OK

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-46

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-45 DNS/WINS servers setup

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-47

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-7 Setup QView

1.) Open: Config -> Connectivity -> QView.
2.) Fill in the URL, Username and Password fields
3.) Tap Save.
4.) Reboot the system.

Figure 3-46 QView setup

3-8-7-1 QView Troubleshooting

In many situations, Qview does not have a clear route to Qpath URL.

Qview can be associated with a different network than the PACs, Qpath Image Storage or Worklist and
require a proxy, DNS (domain name system) or WINS (windows Internet name service) configuration
to provide a clear route between Qview and Qpath. refer to 3-8-6 -Network Proxy/DNS/WINS
configuration.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-48

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-8 Changing the AE Title and/or Port Number (Port No.)

Figure 3-47 AE Title and Port No.

1) To change AE Title and/or Port No., edit the respective fields.

2) Select Save settings to store your changes.
3) Reboot Venue™ to activate the settings, or continue with other Tcpip set-up tasks.

3-8-8-1 Overview
In this case the Venue™ is configured to work with DICOM servers in a network environment. Images
are first saved on the local image buffer on the Venue™ . At the end of the examination the images are
sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM spooler and to the local database, depending on dataflows.

This scenario requires that the Venue™ is configured to be connected to DICOM servers as described
below.
To connect to the DICOM server, the following information has to be entered in the Venue™ :

• The DICOM server IP address.

• The DICOM server port number.
• The DICOM server AE title (the server application’s name).

If Caption Care feature is available, you may configure the Dicom Web option.

To connect to the DICOM WEB:

• Set DICOM WEB url address.

• Set DICOM WEB user name, password.

Note: The Dicom Web option is not available for Generic Dicom Web. The Dicom Web feature is
available only with Caption Guidance option key.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-49

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-8-2 DICOM Server IP Address on the Venue™

Table 3-17 DICOM Server IP Address on the Venue™

Step Instruction Illustration

1. • Log on as ADM.
• Select Connectivity (in the side
menu).
• Select the Dataflow tab.

2. Configure the Dataflow menu according

to required connectivity configuration by
using the On/Off sliders.
If the On/Off slider is set to Off, the
configured settings will not be
applicable to the current dataflow.
On/Off Slider is On

On/Off Slider is Off

3. In the Dataflow menu, tap to select the

required dataflow item. The settings for
the selected item are displayed.
Setup of other dataflow items is similar
to this example.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-50

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-17 DICOM Server IP Address on the Venue™ (Continued)

Step Instruction Illustration

4. • Select DicomWorklist.
• From the IP-address pull-down
menu select the required Worklist
Server.
It is not possible to change the setting in
the IP-Address field by editing it.
To change the IP-Address settings:
• Enter the DICOM server’s AE Title.
This entry is case sensitive and
must match exactly.
• Enter the DICOM server’s Port.No
(Port Number).
• For some DICOM Servers, the
default Time-out setting (30) is too
low.
• Select OK to close the Worklist
properties dialog and save changes

5. • To add the new IP-address, click

the Plus button.
• In the Server Config window, tap to
select and edit the IP-address
details.
• Tap OK to save the configuration.
• The new IP-address is added to the
IP-address pull-down menu.

6. • To delete the IP-address from the

list, tap to open the pull-down menu
and select the required IP-address.
• Tap the Minus button. The selected
IP-address is deleted.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-51

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-8-3 Verify the Network Connection to a Device

Follow the steps below to do a first check (TCP/IP Ping) of the network connection:

1) When on the Dataflow screen, highlight the device to be verified.

2) Select Properties.
3) Select the Check button to Ping the server.
NOTE: By selecting the Check button, a ping is sent to the remote server to see if it is accessible
via the network. It is not a DICOM Echo (DICOM ping), so it does not check AE title or port
number.
4) If the network connection to the server is OK, it will be illustrated by the “Pass” sign, a white check
mark on a green background .

The “Fail” sign indicates that the network connection is failing.

Typical causes:
• Network cable not connected.
• Configuration error(s).

3-8-8-4 Verify the Connection to a Device

1) Select (highlight) the device you want to verify the connection to (1).

NOTE: You can only check one device at a time.

Figure 3-48 Verify Connection to a Device

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-52

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2) Select Check (2) to start the verification process of the connection to the device.
The verification process takes some time to run.

A sign is displayed next to the Check button, indicating if the passed or failed .

NOTE: If the Check button fails immediately, the AE Title is probably wrong. If the Check button fails after a
long time (corresponding to the timeout), the IP address or Port Number is probably wrong.

3-8-8-5 DICOM Storage Setup

The application supports connectivity of up to two DICOM servers.

1) In the Dataflow menu, slide the DICOM Storage 1 On/Off slider to On.
2) Tap to select DICOM storage and to display the DICOM Storage properties screen.

Figure 3-49 Select DICOM Storage

3) If Direct Store is enabled, the image will go to the DICOM server immediately after it is acquired.
You will need to verify that the DICOM server is capable of keeping the connection open for the
time it takes to complete an examination.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-53

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-50 DICOM Storage Properties

3-8-8-6 DICOM Web Setup

NOTE: This option is available for only when Caption Care is available, and will not be enabled for
generic Dicom Web.

NOTE: The Dicom Web and patient QR code features are available only with Caption Guidance option
key

The application supports connectivity to DICOM Web.

1) In the Dataflow menu, slide the DICOM Web On/Off slider to On.
2) Tap to select DICOM Web and to display the DICOM Web properties screen.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-54

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-51 Select DICOM Web

3) To enable the option, enter the following information

• DICOM Web URL address.
• DICOM Web user name and password.

3-8-8-7 DICOM SR
DICOM Structured Reporting (SR) is a standardized format for medical results. Venue™ supports the
specialized form for Echo Ultrasound (“TID 5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report”) and Vascular
Ultrasound (“TID 5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report”) for M&A results.

With the DICOM SR support, M&A for an exam can be sent at the end of the exam or when exported
from local archive. The destination can be either a server on the network (Storage SCP) or a removable
media (DICOM Media) depending on the DICOM dataflow selected.

“TID 5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report” is sent if the exam contains M&A from category
Cardiac or Pediatric (Heart). “TID 5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report” is sent if the exam
contains M&A from category Vascular or Abdominal. If the exam contains M&A from both Cardiac/
Pediatric (Heart) and Vascular/Abdominal categories, two SR documents are sent.

“TID 5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report” and “TID 5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure
Report” do not support all M&A results from Venue™ . They are limited to the following:

• No unassigned measurement.
Refer to the Venue™ Reference manual for a complete list of supported parameters.
• The following modes: 2D, M-mode, Color Flow, PW Doppler, CW Doppler, 3D and TDI.
• Not Modified Simpson method or Bullet methods.
Refer to the Venue™ Reference manual for a complete list of supported methods.
• Basic derivations (Average, Last, Min and Max), no references between the derived measurements
and the ones they were made from.
• Wall Motion Scoring: individual segment scores only according to 16-segment model, no graded
Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-55
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Hypokinesis (only Hypokinesis is used).

DICOM SR must be activated for each DICOM device.

1) Tap Utility/Config on the Touch panel and log on as administrator.

2) Select the Connectivity category and Dataflow subgroup.
The Dataflow menu is displayed.
3) Tap to select the DICOM storage item and to display the DICOM storage properties.

Figure 3-52 DICOM Storage Properties Window

4) Check the option Allow SR to enable DICOM SR.

The following additional options are available:
• Allow SR private data: send the current exam data in a private format. This option is by default
unchecked and should only be used with DICOM storage devices that can handle private data
format.
• No images: no images are sent, only M&A.
• Signed Doppler velocities: send signed Doppler velocities.
• Use older SR version: when checked a Use older SR version pull-down menu is displayed.
The current exam data will be sent in the same format as the selected SR version. Details about
format and content of the SR version can be found in the corresponding user manual of the
selected version.
These settings apply to both “TID 5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report” and “TID 5100
Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report”
5) Tap Apply.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-56

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-9 Set Barcode Reader for patient QR code

If Caption Care feature is available, you may configure the barcode reader patient QR code option.

NOTE: The patient QR code feature is available only with Caption Guidance option key.

The barcode reader option allows scanning patient ID from a printed barcode label; scanning needle
type barcode; scanning user QR code.

To set the barcode reader option and allow accessing patient data via patient QR code, do the
following:

1) Enable the Barcode reader option: In the connectivity --> Dataflow menu, slide the Barcode Reader
On/Off slider to On.

Figure 3-53 Select Barcode Reader

2) Select patient QR code.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-57

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-10 Export Configuration

The destination for Export of patient records to XML and MPEG must be configured prior to use. This
is done from the Config screen.

3-8-10-1 Contents in this Sub-section

Setup on the Remote Share. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Configurable Remote Path User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

3-8-10-2 Setup on the Remote Share

Required setup on the remote share:

1) Add user/password
2) Set Share permissions
3) Set Security permissions

NOTE: The User on the remote share must have all rights/permissions for the shared folder.

The default network user is predefined on Venue™

It is possible to set a secondary user if required by the remote share. For instructions, see: Configurable
Remote Path User on page 3 - 58.

NOTE: The default User / Password is always used as primary log in credential. No attempt is made to use the
secondary if log in succeeds using the primary.

3-8-10-3 Configurable Remote Path User

NOTE: The default User / Password is always used as primary log in credential. No attempt is made to use the
secondary user if log in succeeds using the primary.

NOTE: The configurable (secondary) user and password is used for all remote paths configurable throughout
the system as secondary log in credential.

NOTE: The User on the remote share must have all rights/permissions for the shared folder.

Follow these steps to set up a Secondary Remote Path User:

1) Log on as ADM.
2) Select Connectivity > Tcpip.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-58

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-54 Configurable Remote Path User

3) Enter the User and Password in the respective fields.

NOTE: The field “User” can either be on the form “username”, or “domain\username”.

4) Select Save settings to save the new settings.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-59

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-11 Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Setup

3-8-11-1 Overview
The Query/Retrieve function makes it possible to search for and retrieve DICOM data from a DICOM
server for further analysis on the Venue™ .

NOTE: You may have to set up Venue™ as a destination on the server.

3-8-11-2 Query/Retrieve Setup on the Venue™

1) Open Settings -> Config.
If prompt, Log on as adm.
2) Select Connectivity > Dataflow
3) In the Dataflow menu, set the Dicom QueryRetrieve slider to On.
4.) From the Dataflow menu, tap to select Dicom QueryRetrieve and to display its properties.

Figure 3-55 Select Dicom QueryRetrieve

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-60

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-56 Dicom QR Properties

5) Select the IP-address down-arrow to choose the DICOM Query/Retrieve server from the pull down
menu. In some cases, the server to use is the same as used for DICOM Storage.
6) Enter the correct AE Title and Port Number for the DICOM Query/Retrieve server in the respective
fields in the DICOM QR Properties screen.

3-8-11-2-1 Change Search Criterias

It is possible to set up special Search Criterias for DICOM QR. In most cases you may leave the Search
Criterias as is, and skip this adjustment.

Follow the steps below to change the Search Criterias parameters:

1) Select Search Criterias (ref: Figure 3-57.)

Figure 3-57 Select Search Criterias

2) Select the correct tag from the Select Tag pull-down menu.
3) If needed, type in the value.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-61

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4) Select Update List.

5) Select OK to close the Search Criterias window.

3-8-11-3 Query/Retrieve Verification

Figure 3-58 DICOM Query/Retrieve Properties

Follow the steps below to do a first check (TCP-IP Ping) of the connection:

1) If not already selected, select DICOM QR to display the Dicom QR properties.

2) Select the Check button to ping the server.
NOTE: The Check button checks if the remote server is accessible (ping). This isn’t a DICOM Echo
(DICOM ping), so it doesn’t check AE title or port number.

3) If the network connection to the server is OK, it will be illustrated by a green symbol .

A red symbol indicates that the network connection is failing.

Typical causes:
• Network cable not connected.
• Configuration error(s).
4) When ready, select OK to close the DICOM Query/Retrieve properties and save changes.
Follow the steps below to check the DICOM Query/Retrieve dataflow:

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-62

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE: This check uses both Ping and DICOM Ping. Ping is used to verify the TCP/IP connection to the server.
DICOM Ping is used to verify that the DICOM application is answering.

1) Select DicomQR from the Selected devices list.

2) Select Check.

3-8-11-3-1 If Retrieve is failing …

If Retrieve is failing, but Query is functioning, verify if the scanner has been registered as a receiver on
the server.

3-8-12 TLS - Transport Layer Security V1.2 configuration.

3-8-12-1 Background
This encryption allows the modality user to encrypt the communication between the modality and the
DICOM destination. Services which support this encryption are:

• Modality Worklist
• PACS storage
• Query Retrieve
During configuration of any of the above-mentioned services - it is possible to select the Enable
Encryption checkbox.

After the checkbox was selected, a button with Enable Encryption becomes available.

Once clicking the button, you will get a dialog to choose a certificate from the local certificate store.

You can also decide whether he would like to verify the server certificate. (Check the other side
certificate).

In case the encryption environment was configured not to use certificates, it's possible to omit the
certificate selection and only select the Enable Encryption checkbox.

Figure 3-59 Enable Encryption

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-63

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3-60 Encryption configuration

3-8-13 Security LDAP configuration

1.) Open Settings -> Config -> Admin tab.
2.) Tap LDAP tab.
3.) Contact the local IT department and fill in all LDAP settings.

Figure 3-61 LDAP settings Tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-64

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-14 RFID badge configuration

1.) Open Settings -> Config -> Admin tab.
2.) Tap Session Management tab.
3.) Enable RFID badge support checkbox.
4.) Fill in Badge Authentication URL and Domain.
5.) Fill in LDAP credentials in order to connect to the LDAP server.

Figure 3-62 Session Management tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-65

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-8-15 RSVP Configuration

1.) From the application screen select: Settings -> Service -> RSVP

2.) Select Service Desktop

3.) Select Agent Configuration tab

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-66

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Make sure the Production server is selected. If applicable, check the enable proxy check box and
fill in the proxy details (contact the local IT team for support).

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-67

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-9
Options Setup
3-9-1 Software Options
Most of the options for Venue™ are activated by installing a password (alphanumeric text string).

For installation instructions, see: Software Options Configuration on page 3 - 35.

3-9-2 USB Flash Card Setup

There is no special setup procedure for use of a USB Flash Card.

3-9-3 Wireless Network Adapter

The Wireless Network adaptor should be connected to the USB port located on the rear side of the
cockpit (monitor).

NOTE: It is possible to connect the Wireless Network adapter both when the system is powered ON, and after
it is powered OFF.

All software drivers for the Wireless Network are pre-installed for the designated Wireless Network
adaptor only.

3-9-4 Wireless Probe 1st time Registration Setup

The following instructions are required for wireless probe first time registration.

NOTICE IMPORTANT During Stand-by mode, it is NOT recommended to introduce or remove USB
devices; this may cause the system to lock-up during the boot-up procedure.

WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A DIFFERENT TYPE OF WIRELESS NETWORK ADAPTOR.

THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS AN EXTREMELY SENSITIVE AND COMPLEX
MEDICAL SYSTEM. ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERIPHERALS MAY CAUSE SYSTEM
FAILURE OR DAMAGE!

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-68

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-10
Registration and Pairing (First-time Activation) of Wireless Probe
When a new wireless probe is presented to the system, a short setup procedure is required, to pair the
device with the system (i.e. “handshake”. where the BT recognizes the VA device); then identify and
register the specific device as GE user (i.e. find the device appears in GE Avory database, and relate it
to the specific user-account - either existing or new.) (This phase requires external internet); and then
open the device for on-going usage. After performing this first time pairing and activation, the probe can
be used with all GE systems.

To perform the above first-time connection-pairing-activation, follow these steps:

1) Purchase Vscan Air CL or SL wireless probes and license key, see 3-9-1
2) Install the wireless-probe connection-aid device (Bluetooth for initial pairing, and WIFI for on-
going communication with the probe): HAM Box (for venue fit, venue go systems) or split power
cable and adjustments for wireless probes (for venue systems) (for details refer to your relevant
installation instructions document)
3.) Verify external Internet connection: Ensure the system is connected to external Internet, to allow
probe registration to GE Backoffice.
4) Turn ON the probe, see 3-10-3
5) Perform first time probe connection and activation (3-10-4). The system will guide you through
the following steps:
1.) Pairing: The system identifies the probe via BT and performs pairing, see 3-10-4-1
2.) Registration: The system identifies the probe is not registered, and requests that you register
the probe to GE HealthCare server, by entering an email address of either an existing GE user
accounts, or create a new one, see 3-10-4-2
3.) Registration complete: The system identifies the user, registers the probe as GE HealthCare
medical device and its relevant features, and opens it for on-going usage. see 3-10-4-1

Note: After registering via the access key and pairing, the system will indicate and allow selecting
the wireless probe, and setting it as default.

6) You may now: Connect and Use the activated (and paired) probe, see 3-10-5

3-10-1 Purchase Vscan Air Wireless probe and license key

The Vscan Air CL and SL probes and license key are purchased from GE HealthCare.

For the probe usage, refer to vendor’s instructions (see:https://vscanair-support.gehealthcare.com/

support/home).

3-10-2 Verify External Internet

To allow probe registration to GE server, verify your system has External Internet connection.

3-10-3 Turn ON wireless probe

NOTE: The probe has a single button, where:

• A long press turns the device ON/OFF.

• A short press provides indications on the probe battery status, and initiates Bluetooth scanning
and handshake. When the handshake is done, the Bluetooth is turned OFF, and the wifi is
turned ON.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-69

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

1) Press on the probe button to turn it ON.

2) Press shortly on the probe button to initiate Bluetooth scanning and pairing ("handshake").

3-10-4 Perform Wireless-Probe first time connection (Registration and pairing)

3-10-4-1 Perform Probe Pairing

1) Login to the system and click Login

2) Click Connect to initiate first time Bluetooth connection between the Wireless Probe and the venue
system (i.e. pairing; Handshake)

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-70

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3) In the presented dialog, click Connect a new probe

4) Follow the instructions to activate the software on the new registered probe:
1.) Press the button on the probe for 2 seconds, until blue lights appear. Then click Next

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-71

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2.) Wait while the label indicates the probe is being initialized

3.) When the label indicates Connecting, press the button on the probe shortly (also
indicated by screen animation)

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-72

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Wait until the screen indicates the probe was found

5.) When the dialog closes, the probe is paired.

Note: Continue to probe registration, see 3-10-4-2

3-10-4-2 Register the probe to GE HealthCare Server

To register the probe in GE back office:
1) After clicking connect (see the phase above), the system checks if the probe is registered. If the
probe is NOT registered, the system indicates the probe is not registered:

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2.) Click on the Register button. The following pop-up screen appears:

Chapter 3 - System Setup

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3) Do one of the following:

• To use existing account: enter your email account credentials
• To use a new account: Click on Create New Account. The system will prompt you to access
Vscan website and create a new account:

Chapter 3 - System Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3-10-5 Connect and Use activated (paired and registered) probe

Note: You may now use the wireless probe. below are guidelines for probe usage. For more
details refer to the user manual

1) Login to the system as administrator and click Login

2) Click on Scan

3.) Follow the on-screen instructions, indicating if the probe is found, connected, charging, etc.

WARNING WHEN CONNECTING PERIPHERALS TO THE Venue™ SYSTEM, UNLESS THE

PERIPHERAL IS MEDICAL-GRADE EQUIPMENT IT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE
ISOLATED USB CONNECTOR.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-77

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

NOTICE IMPORTANT During Stand-by mode, it is NOT recommended to introduce or remove USB
devices; this may cause the system to lock-up during the boot-up procedure.

WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A DIFFERENT TYPE OF WIRELESS NETWORK ADAPTOR.

THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS AN EXTREMELY SENSITIVE AND COMPLEX
MEDICAL SYSTEM. ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERIPHERALS MAY CAUSE SYSTEM
FAILURE OR DAMAGE!

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-78

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-11
Paperwork After Setup
NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (i.e. storage media with documentation, User Manuals,
Installation Manuals, etc.) for the Venue™ and the peripherals must be kept as part of the original
Ultrasound system documentation. This ensures that all relevant safety and user information is
available during the operation and service of the complete Ultrasound system.

3-11-1 Installation Acceptance Test Criteria

A Venue™ is ready for use after the system has been configured successfully in accordance with the
information provided in Chapter 3 -System Setup (this chapter).

3-11-2 User’s Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) or storage media with User Manuals, per software (SW) revision
and language, for the system is included.

3-11-3 Product Locator Installation Card

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card.
From the factory, a sheet with five Product Locator cards for transportation and one for Installation are
included.

Figure 3-63 Product Locator Installation Card (Example)

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-79

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 3-12
Disk Encryption

3-12-1 Introduction
The user may format a USB memory device or a USB HD device and then use BitLocker s/w to encrypt the
device.

NOTE: BitLocker is a full disk encryption feature included with Windows 7 and later. It is designed to protect
data by providing encryption for entire volumes.

Disk encryption can be enabled for patient data stored on the system. By default, disk encryption is disabled.
When enabling disk encryption, you are prompted to choose an encryption password, as well as a storage
location for the recovery key.

NOTE: While the system is undergoing encryption, it cannot be used.

We highly recommend performing disk encryption overnight, or when the system is not needed for an
extended period.

NOTE: Should the system power down during disk encryption, or otherwise cease to function, a prompt
appears when restarting the system to continue disk encryption

When starting up the system, the encrypted disk must be unlocked for the users to access images, local
archive, and other patient information. The disk can be unlocked in one of the following ways:

• Enter the previously selected encryption password.

• Insert a USB memory stick with the stored recovery key in the system at start-up, or when the Unlock dialog
appears.
• Enter the recovery key manually.
WARNING! Without the Encryption Password or Recovery Key, it is not possible to access patient information,
images, or local archive.
GE has no access to this information or the ability to undo encryption in the event that the Encryption
Password and Recovery Key are lost. Maintaining the Encryption Password and Recovery Key are solely
the user's responsibility.

WARNING! This step is mandatory for US customers, and is highly recommended for all Venue family
customers.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-80

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3-12-2 Procedure Steps

Follow the steps below to perform the procedure

3-12-2-1 Step 1: Using the encrypted device

Perform the following:

• Insert a USB device for encryption-password storage to any available USB port.

3-12-2-2 Step 2: Encryption

Perform the following steps:

1. A pop-up window appears: Disk encryption.

2. Tap Settings→Config and log on as administrator, if required

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-81

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Select the Admin category and Disk encryption tab. The following tab appears:

Disk Encryption tab

Figure 1: Admin - Disk Encryption

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-82

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Select Encryption ON radio button. A dialog appears, explaining that the procedure will take time, and is
recommended to be executed during night. Press Yes to continue procedure.

Select encryption
ON radio button

5. Press Yes to continue procedure:

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-83

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6. The system will request password for the encrypted data.

7. Enter the desired password and retype it in the password confirmation field. Ensure your password
complies with the password length policy: longer than 7 digits

8. The system confirms password has been set:

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-84

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9. In order to maintain the password, please save it to the USB drive. You may:

a. Click on the Show key toggle button

b. The system indicates the key, as illustrated below. Click Hide key to hide this information:

Show/hide
toggle button

Note: if you choose the Change Key, the system warns the user that the current key backups will no longer be
used to unlock patient data:

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-85

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

10. The user may change the recovery key and use another USB device. To do so: Click Change Key. The
system prompts that all previous backups will no longer be valid:

11. Press yes. Then select the USB drive on which you wish to save the data, from the roll-down menu:

12. Click OK. The encryption of patient data procedure begins:

13. When the procedure ends, click OK.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-86

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3-12-2-3 Step 3: Accessing system with encrypted data

When an encryption is set, and the system is shut down and turned ON, the system prompts the user for a
key to access the data:

The user may access the data by either:

• Connecting the USB that contains the Encryption key to the system.

• Entering the password

• Typing the recovery key

Note: you may turn OFF the disk encryption at any time.

The procedure is complete.

Chapter 3 - System Setup 3-87

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 4
General Procedures and Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4
This chapter includes the General Procedures, and the Functional Checks.

General Procedures is a collection of commonly-used procedures that are available by cross references
from other parts of this manual.

Functional Checks is a collection of procedures for quickly checking major functions of the Venue™
scanner and diagnostic instructions using the built-in service software. These checks can be a great
asset in determining whether the Venue™ is working as it should.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-2
General Procedures

CAUTION Ultrasound system requires all covers.

Operate this Ultrasound system only when all board covers and
frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for
safe operation, good Ultrasound system performance and
cooling purposes.

WARNING Energy Control and Power Lockout for Venue™ .

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is
exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:
1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.
2. Turn off the breaker.
3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.
4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.
5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as
there are no test points to verify isolation.
6. Remove/disconnect the battery, if present.
Ultrasound System components may be energized.

4-2-1 Overview
Some procedures are used more often than others. The intention of this section is to keep the most used
procedures in one place.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2 Power ON/Boot-up

4-2-2-1 Warnings

DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM TO A FIXED POWER

SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.

DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS

THE SAFETY GROUND.

DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT
THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE
(WHERE REQUIRED).

CAUTION THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS.

OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE SECURELY
IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.

CAUTION USE ONLY POWER SUPPLY CORDS, CABLES AND PLUGS PROVIDED BY OR DESIGNATED BY GE
HealthCare.

NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push
the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.Do not cycle the
Power ON/OFF switch ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds.
When turning OFF the Power ON/OFF switch, the Ultrasound system should de-energize completely
before turning the switch ON

NOTE: Before performing Power ON or system reboot, disconnect any USB mass storage device from the
system (unless a Software Installation procedure is required and the appropriate software installation
storage device is connected).

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2-2 Connecting AC (Mains) Power to the Venue™ Ultrasound Unit

Connecting the Venue™ ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level
and compliance with electrical safety requirements.

1) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type.

2) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label on the rear of
the Venue™ ultrasound scanner.

Power ON/OFF Switch

Power Inlet
(AC IN)

Figure 4-1 Power ON/OFF Switch and Power (AC IN) Socket - Rear Panel
5.) Connect the AC Power Cable female plug to the Power Inlet (AC IN) at the rear of the unit - see
Figure 4-1.
6.) Screw the plastic cable clamp (into the hole provided in the support column - centrally located at
the rear of the system.
7.) Connect the other end of the AC Power Cable (male plug) to a hospital-grade mains power outlet
with the proper rated voltage.

NOTE: The System should be connected to mains few hours to fully charge the batteries before battery
operation.

NOTE: The LED on the Input Power Panel (IPP) is illuminated green, indicating that the system in connected
to mains. The AC power indicator on the cockpit (monitor) is illuminated green.

The unit is ready for Power On/Boot Up.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2-3 Switch ON the AC Power to Venue™

1) Turn ON the Power ON/OFF switch located behind the silicon cap on the MPB door.
After the Rear ON\OFF switch is switched to ON, wait about 15 sec for initial System SOM
readiness.
2) Press the system On/Off touch button(Figure 4-2) on the cockpit (monitor) to boot up the unit.

On/Off Button

Figure 4-2 On/Off Button on Cockpit (monitor)

During normal boot-up, you may observe that:

a.) The unit’s ventilation fans start on full speed, but slow down after the application is loaded.
b.) The Back-End Processor and the rest of the scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next
steps:
1.) Back-End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
2.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
3.) A start-up progress bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed.
4.) The software initiates and sets up the Front-End electronics and the rest of the scanner.
5.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating
that no probe has been connected.

NOTE: Total time for start-up is approximately 1 minute.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-3 Power Shutdown

CAUTION Before performing any service activities related to electronic boards and/or accessible metal
parts, make sure to disconnect any power source from the system:
- Switch off the circuit breaker located at the back side of the system.
- Disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet and from the system.
- Remove Internal battery packs.

After pressing the On/Off button on the cockpit, the SYSTEM - EXIT dialog window will be displayed.

Figure 4-3 Exit Dialog Window

The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, gives you these choices:

• Exit
(Only available when logged in as GE HealthCare Service with Service Dongle)
Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows Desktop.

NOTE: If you need to restart Venue™ when logged on to the Windows Desktop, ensure that you do a complete
power down (Shut Down). This is required to power up the Front End Processor.

• Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down.

If the Shutdown button is greyed out or the system cannot be shutdown normally:

Set the power switch, located on the rear lower part of the system, to the OFF position.

Wait for 10 seconds and re-set the power switch to the ON position.

• Wait for about 15 Sec before the System is operational.

Power ON/OFF Switch

Power Inlet
(AC IN)

Figure 4-4 Power ON/OFF Switch and Power (AC IN) Socket - Rear Panel
• Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The physical On/Off button functionality can be disabled in the Config screen.

In order to disable/enable the functionality of the On/Off physical button, open Settings -> Config ->
Imaging -> Global Settings and check or uncheck the Disable physical power button box.

Figure 4-5 Disable Physical Power Button in Config Screen

When the physical power button functionality is disabled, pressing the physical On/Off button on the
cockpit, will trigger the following message:

Figure 4-6 Physical power button disabled message

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

To switch off the system tap Settings -> Off. This action will trigger the display of the System Exit
window.

Figure 4-7 Software Off Button

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-4 Logging On to the Venue™ as “ADM”

4-2-4-1 Select Config via the Cockpit (Monitor)

1) Select Settings.

2) Then select Config

This will bring up the Operator Login dialog where you can log on to Venue™ .

4-2-4-2 The Login dialog

The first time someone log in to Venue™ , the Operator field will be blank.

Figure 4-8 Operator Login

As default, two users are defined on Venue™ ; USR and ADM.

• If you log on as USR, you will have a restricted access to the setup menus.
Example: To select a printer.
As default, no password has been set for USR. Just type the name USR and select Login.
• If you log on as ADM, you will have access to all setup menus and service adjustments on the
Venue™ system.
Example: Adjust network and connectivity settings.

NOTE: It is possible for the administrator (ADM) to establish new users and set unique passwords for each
user, including a new password for ADM. If the login as ADM fails, contact the responsible person in the
hospital to get access.

The Emergency button stores data for the duration of the current examination only.

The Cancel button is used to cancel the login.

4-2-5 Data Management

For information, refer to the latest revision of the Venue™ User Manual.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-6 Deleting Patient Information

WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still
functional. In some countries, you may be required to delete all software
from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse.
Follow your local policies.

WARNING All patient information (images, reports and data base) must be backed
up before deleting it from the internal hard drive.

Ensure that All Patient Information has been deleted before:

• shipping/returning the ultrasound system

• you dispose of the hard drive
Wipe the SSD partitions as described here:

1) Reload the system software from the software media.

2) Select: Format SSD and Install.

4-2-7 Cockpit (Monitor) Position Adjustment

The Cockpit (monitor) position can be adjusted for easy viewing.

NOTE: Before adjusting the cockpit (monitor) position, lock the front swivel and full lock caster located
on the system front left side (user right side).

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the

range of motion before moving the cockpit and monitor
arm. This includes both objects and people.

4-2-7-1 To Adjust the Cockpit (Monitor) Position

By holding the cockpit (monitor) handle, the up/down and left/right position of the cockpit can be
adjusted.

To tilt the cockpit (monitor), use the lever handle and adjust the cockpit (monitor) to the desired angle.

4-2-8 Moving and Transporting the Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner

4-2-8-1 The Casters (Wheels) Control

The pedals located between the left front and right back wheels of the Venue™ control the swivel and
brake on the wheels.

Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or jamming.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

CAUTION Unlock the brakes on the front and back wheels when preparing to
transport the unit.
Lock the brakes on the front and back wheels, if parking the system on an
incline. Avoid ramp steeper than 10 degrees.

4-2-8-2 To Prepare the Venue™ to be Moved

1) Make sure the cockpit (monitor) is centered and in its down position.
2) Remove the plug from the wall.
3) Disconnect all cables linking the unit to any off-board peripheral devices and network.
4) Secure the unit’s power cable.
5) Place all probes in the probe holders. Ensure that the probe cables do not protrude from the unit or
interfere with the wheels.
6) Ensure that no loose items are left on the unit.
7) Unlock the casters.

Related information:

• Cockpit (Monitor) Position Adjustment on page 4 - 10

• Power Shutdown on page 4 - 6

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-8-3 To Ensure Safety while Moving the Venue™

1) Ensure that the cockpit (monitor) is in its down position.
2.) Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds. Grasp the back handle bar and
push. Do not attempt to move the unit using cables or probe connectors. Take extra care while
moving the unit on inclines.
3) Ensure that the unit does not strike the walls or door frames.
4) Ensure that the pathway is clear.
5) Move the unit slowly and carefully.

CAUTION Avoid ramps that are steeper than 10 degrees.

6) Use two or more persons to move the unit over long distances or on inclines.

Related information:

• Cockpit (Monitor) Position Adjustment on page 4 - 10

4-2-8-4 Transporting the Venue™ by Vehicle

Take extra care when transporting the Venue™ by vehicle. In addition to the precautions listed earlier,
follow the steps below.

• Center the cockpit (monitor) and move it to its down position.

• Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes.
• Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the unit’s weight.
• Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading.
• Secure the Venue™ while it is on the lift, to prevent rolling and do not attempt to hold it in place by
hand.
• Cushion the Venue™ and strap the lower part so that it does not break loose.
• Ensure that the Venue™ is secured inside the vehicle. Secure it with straps to the two hooks under
the system to prevent movement while in transit.
• Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage.

Related information:

• To Ensure Safety while Moving the Venue™ on page 4 - 12

• Cockpit (Monitor) Position Adjustment on page 4 - 10

4-2-8-5 At the New Location

• When the Venue™ is in place at a new location, lock the wheel brakes.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-3
Functional Checks
4-3-1 Overview
The functional checks for Venue™ are described in this section.

Functional checks are used to verify that the Venue™ operates as intended.

The functional checks may also be used during troubleshooting.

4-3-2 Performance Checks

4-3-2-1 Test Phantoms

The use of test phantoms is only recommended if required by your facility's (customer’s) QA program.

4-3-3 2D Mode (B Mode) Checks

4-3-3-1 Introduction
The 2D Mode is the system’s default mode.

4-3-3-2 Preparations
1) Connect one of the probes.
2) Turn ON the Venue™ .
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

Figure 4-9 The 2D Screen (Cardiac)

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-3-3 Adjust the 2D Mode Controls

WARNING Always use the minimum power required to obtain acceptable

images in accordance with applicable guidelines and policies.
The following controls can be adjusted to optimize the 2D Mode display:

• Swipe to page 2 on the Touch panel and press either Soft or Sharp Auto Tissue setting.
- Soft: optimizes the radial and lateral uniformity and brightness of the tissue continuously in
real-time.
The mention “Soft” is displayed on the upper right corner of the image area

- Sharp: further enhances the image display by optimizing the gray scale curve.
The mention “Sharp” is displayed on the upper right corner of the image area

The Auto Tissue setting (Soft or Sharp) can be turned on/off by pressing Auto on the Control panel.
The last used setting is then applied.
The Auto Tissue settings are only available in live scanning and cannot be turned off when the
image is stored.
• If available, press Virtual Apex (probe dependent) to improve near field imaging, allowing
increased visibility up to the width of the full probe aperture close to the surface.
• Use the Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image.
Gain increases or decreases the amount of echo information displayed. TGC compensates for
depth-related attenuation in the image.

• Use the Depth control to adjust the range to be imaged.

• Use the Modes to toggle between the scanning system’s main modes.
• Use the Frequency control (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
• Press to activate the Needle Visualization mode. Gain, Angle and Tilt can be activated. The needle
function only applies to linear probes and the C1-5-RS convex probe.
• Use Split to split the screen into two, allowing to see different, independent views on each half.
• Use the Reject control to reduce noise in the image.
• Use the DDP control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less noisy
image.
• Use UD Clarity (Cardiac) or UD Speckle reduce (non-cardiac) to reduce image speckle. Extra care
must be taken to select the optimal Speckle reduction level, as too much filtering of speckle can
mask or obscure desired image detail.
• Adjust Octave to toggle between fundamental and Harmonic mode.
• Press Color maps and select a grey map from the menu on screen.

4-3-4 M Mode Checks

4-3-4-1 M-Mode Overview

This unit has three types of M-Mode:

• Conventional M-Mode (MM): displays a distance/time plot of a cursor line in the axial plane of
the 2D-image.
• Anatomical M-Mode (AMM): displays a distance/time plot from a cursor line, which is
independent from the axial plane. AMM is available in greyscale, color, TVI, Tissue Tracking,
Strain rate and Strain modes.
Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-14
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Curved Anatomical M-Mode (CAMM): displays a distance/time plot from a free-drawn cursor
line. CAMM is available in greyscale, color, TVI, Tissue Tracking, Strain rate and Strain modes.
Conventional M-Mode can be combined with Color Mode.

4-3-4-2 Preparations
1) Connect one of the probes, to any of the probe connectors.
2) Turn ON the scanner.
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

3) Press MM on the Operator panel to bring up an M-Mode picture on the screen.

4) Position the cursor over the required area of the image.

4-3-4-3 Using M-Mode

4-3-4-3-1 Conventional M-Mode

1) To access M-Mode from any other scan mode, press MM on the control panel.
2) Position the cursor over the required area of the image.
3) Press Freeze.
4) Scroll through the data acquired.

4-3-4-3-2 Anatomical M-Mode

1) In M-Mode or 2D-Mode Freeze, press AMM on the Touch panel.

NOTE: Anatomical M-Mode can also be used with previously acquired digitally stored 2D images. More than
one heart cycle should be stored if performing M-Mode in post processing.

2) Position the cursor over the required area of the image.

3) Rotate the solid cursor line to the desired direction.

4-3-4-3-3 Curved Anatomical M-Mode

1) In M-Mode, press Curved AMM.
2) Position the starting point of the time motion curve.
3) Press Select to anchor the starting point of the time motion curve.
4) Position the next point of the time motion curve.
5) Press Select to anchor the point of the time motion curve.
6) Repeat step 4 and step 5 up to draw a complete time motion curve.

NOTE: The time motion curve can be edited by following the curve back to the desired point and redraw.

7) On the last point, press Select twice to terminate the curve.

NOTE: To edit the time motion curve, select a point, move it to a new position and press Select.

4-3-4-4 Optimizing M-Mode

The use of preset gives optimum performance with minimum adjustment. If necessary, the following
controls can be adjusted to further optimize the M-Mode display:

• Adjust Horizontal sweep to optimize the display resolution.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Adjust Gain and TGC controls to adjust the range to be imaged.

• Use the Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or the Frame rate control (move to lower frame
rate) to increase resolution in image.
• Adjust Dynamic range to optimize the useful range of incoming echoes to the available greyscale.
• Adjust Compress to further optimize the display.
• Adjust Reject to reduce noise while taking care not to eliminate significant low-level diagnostic
information.

4-3-4-5 Using Color Mode

4-3-4-5-1 Color 2D
1) From an optimized 2D image, press Color.
2) Position the ROI frame over the area to be examined.
3) Press Select. The instruction Size should be highlighted.
4) Adjust the dimension of the ROI.

4-3-4-5-2 Color M-Mode

1) From M-Mode press Color.
2) Position the color area in the M-Mode display.
3) Press Select. The instruction Size should be highlighted.
4) Adjust the dimension of the color area.

4-3-5 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks

4-3-5-1 Introduction
PW and CW Doppler modes are used to measure velocity (most often in blood).

Doppler mode can be done with a special pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary
probe, you can first bring up a 2D picture for navigation purpose and then add PW/CW Doppler.

4-3-5-2 PW and CW Doppler Overview

Related information:

Refer to the Venue™ User Manual.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-5-3 Using PW/CW Doppler Modes

4-3-5-3-1 Alternative 1
1) Press PW or CW. A scanning screen is displayed with a Doppler cursor on the 2D mode image and
a Doppler spectrum in the lower part of the screen.
2) Position the Doppler cursor line and in PW the sample volume location over the area of interest.
3) In PW, adjust the Sample Volume.

NOTE: Sample Volume adjustment may affect the Scale, Frame rate and LV rej. settings.

4-3-5-4 Optimizing PW/CW Doppler Modes

The use of preset gives optimum performance with minimum adjustment. If necessary, the following
controls can be adjusted to further optimize the PW/CW modes display:

• Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area.
• Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement.
• In PW mode, adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution, or higher setting to more
easily locate the disturbed flows. Adjustment of the Sample volume may affect the PRF (Nyquist
limit) settings.
• Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain the
desired intensity display.
• Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display. Higher setting will improve resolution and the lower
setting will increase the depth penetration.
• Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve
resolution.

NOTE: Frequency and Frame rate settings may affect the Low Velocity Reject.

• Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. This is particularly
important in CW mode, as the energy duty cycle is 100% (constant).

NOTE: The Doppler Power setting affects only Doppler operating modes.

CAUTION Use all noise reduction controls with care. Excessive

application may obscure low level diagnostic information.

Adjust the following settings to further optimize the display of the image.
• Use the Horizontal sweep to optimize the sweep speed.
• To view signal detail, adjust Scale to enlarge the vertical spectral Doppler trace. Velocity range
directly controls the pulse repetition frequency, which is responsible for the setting of the Nyquist
limit (the ability to detect maximum velocity without aliasing).
• Use Invert to reverse the vertical component of the spectral Doppler area of the display.
• Use Quick angle and Angle correction to steer the ultrasound beam to the blood flow to be
measured (Not typically required during cardiac studies).
• Adjust LPRF (PW Doppler mode only) to toggle between high and low Pulse Repetition Frequency
(PRF). When the Doppler PRF is raised beyond a certain limit, more than one Doppler gate is
displayed on the screen.
• Press Auto on the Control panel to activate Automatic Spectrum Optimization (ASO). ASO is used
to automatically adjust baseline and scale of the PW/CW spectrum to optimize the spectral display.
It will avoid the display of a folded spectrum and stretch the spectrum vertically as large as possible.
ASO optimization is not continuous but performed instantaneously each time Auto is pressed.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-6 Probe/Connectors Check

NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or OFF

CAUTION Take the following precautions with the probe cables:

• Keep away from the wheels.
• Do not bend.
• Do not cross cables between probes.

Table 4-18 Probe and Connectors Checks

Step Task Expected Result(s)

Press Probe on the Operator Panel. A list of the connected probes will pop
1
up on the screen.
Select the desired probe. An application menu for the desired
2
probe is listed on the screen.
• Browse to the desired application. The selected application starts.
• Press Select to launch the application.
3
• To change application without changing the current
probe, press Appl. on the Operator Panel.

4 Verify no missing channels. All channels are functioning.

Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific to the No EMI/RFI or artifacts.

5
probe.

6 Check the probe in each active connector slot. It will display pictorial data each time.

7 Do a leakage test on the probe. It passes the test.

8 Repeat this procedure for all available probes.

Related information:

• Electrical Safety Tests on page 10 - 15

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-7 Cineloop Check

4-3-7-1 Introduction
A cineloop is a sequence of images recorded over a certain time frame. When frozen, the System
automatically displays the cineloop boundary markers on either side of the last detected heart cycle

4-3-7-2 Preparation
1) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.
2) Turn ON the scanner. The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

4-3-7-3 Using Cineloop

4-3-7-3-1 Selection of a Cineloop

1) Press Freeze.
2) Press 2D Freeze.
The selected heart beat is played back.

3) Press 2D Freeze to freeze the cineloop.

4) Scroll through the acquisition and find the sequence of interest.
5) Adjust Cycle select to move from heart beat to heart beat and select the heart cycle of interest.
6) Adjust Num cycles to increase or decrease the number of heart beats to be played back.
7) In Freeze, press Set left or Set right to set the corresponding cineloop boundary to the current
frame.
8) Adjust Left marker and Right marker to trim or expand the cineloop boundaries.
9) Press 2D Freeze to run the cineloop and Img. Store to store the cineloop or Freeze to return to live
scanning.

NOTE: Cineloop storage can be configured to store heart cycles with additional time before and after the
R-wave and to display a preview before storage.

4-3-7-3-2 Adjustment of Cineloop Playback

• Adjust Speed to increase or decrease the speed of the cineloop playback.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-8 Audio Check

4-3-8-1 Introduction
• The system default settings is to play audible feedback while pressing any action key (i.e. storing
an image, changing mode, typing text etc.). This functionality can be disabled in the Config screen
under system settings tab.

Figure 4-10 UDI label attached to Software installation media Label

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-9 Peripheral Checks

4-3-9-1 Printer Checks

The internal printer is controlled from the Print button on the Venue™ ’s application main screen.

Table 4-19 outlines the steps for performing Printer checks.

Table 4-19 Printer Checks

Step Task Expected Result(s)

1 When scanning in 2D Color Image scanning stops with the last

Mode, press Freeze to stop picture on the screen.
image acquisition.

2 Press the Print button The image displayed on the screen is

printed on the assigned printer.

3 Check if the print quality on the

pictures from both printers are of
expected quality.

4-3-9-2 Windows Print Test Page

This checks that the printer is correctly installed and hooked up at the Windows level.

1) On the Venue™ application main screen, tap: Settings > Config > Connectivity > Additional
Outputs.
2) In the Printer Setup section, verify that the selected printer is Sony UP-D711MD.

Figure 4-11 Verifying Selected Printer

3.) Tap on Queue.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4) In the Sony UP-D711MD window, select Printer > Properties.

Figure 4-12 Printer Window

5) In the Sony UP-D711MD Properties window, tap Print Test Page (this will send a print to the
printer bypassing all of the Scanner software).

Figure 4-13 Printing Test Page

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6) The message A test page has been sent to your printer appears.

Figure 4-14 Sony Printer Notification

NOTE: For the Sony small-format printers, you will see an incomplete Test Page printed out. This is normal.

4-3-9-3 ECG Checks

The system automatically detects the ECG module once connected. The indication for the user will be
displayed in the Peripherals status area.

Figure 4-15 Peripheral Status Area

In order to check the functionality of the ECG device, the ECG leads need to be connected to person
body or to an ECG simulator.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-10 Mechanical Functions Checks

4-3-10-1 Monitor Articulated Arm Movement Check

Step Task Expected Result(s) Illustration

Pull down the tilt and The up and down

locking black handle (it is movement locking
1 located under the cockpit mechanism is released,
on the front of the Venue™ allowing the arm to be
system). raised or lowered.

Ensure that you do not

apply too much force to
Hold the cockpit handle and move the cockpit and that
raise the cockpit upwards, the movement is smooth.
then downwards and make
2 sure it is able to reach its
maximum lowest and During the movement up
maximum highest and down, make sure the
positions. image displayed on the
monitor does not present
any disturbance.

Make sure the arm is

Move down the cockpit to locked and no movement
its maximum lowest is observed when
3
position, until it is locked in moderate force is applied
place. to the cockpit (upwards
and downwards).

Ensure that you do not

apply too much force to
Check the swivel as move the cockpit and that
follows: the movement is smooth.
Hold the cockpit monitor
4
and move it to its maximum During the movement left
left and then to its and right, make sure the
maximum right positions. image displayed on the
monitor does not present
any disturbance.

Table 4-20 Monitor Articulated Arm Movement Check

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Step Task Expected Result(s) Illustration

Ensure that you do not

apply too much force to
move the cockpit and that
the movement is smooth.
Check the arm tilt as
5 follows:
During the tilt movement,
Tilt the cockpit up to 40o
make sure the image
displayed on the monitor
does not present any
disturbance.

Tilt the cockpit by 45o Make sure the locking

mechanism is locked
Pull down the tilt and when reaching 45o.
6 locking black handle (it is
located under the cockpit The tilt locking
on the front of the Venue™ mechanism is released.
system) to release the tilt
locking mechanism.

Ensure that you do not

apply too much force to
Check the arm pan as move the cockpit and that
follows: the movement is smooth.
Hold the cockpit monitor
7 and move it to its maximum
During the pan movement
pan left and then to its
left and right, make sure
maximum pan right
the image displayed on
positions.
the monitor does not
present any disturbance.

Table 4-20 Monitor Articulated Arm Movement Check

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-10-2 Swivel and Full Lock Casters Function Check

Table 4-21 Brakes and Swivel Function Check

Step Task Expected Result(s)

Red lever - full lock

Green lever - swivel lock
Grey lever - full unlock

Push down on the upper grey lever to unlock the brake Ensure that the wheels move freely in all directions.
1 and swivel on the casters. Push and pull the unit right, Check the wheels for wear and tear, and replace if
left, backwards and forwards. necessary.

Press the foot brake (red lever) down on each caster

wheel to lock the swivel and full lock wheels in position. Ensure that the wheels are locked and there is no
2
Push and pull the unit right, left, backwards and movement in any direction.
forwards.

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-11 Electrical Tests

4-3-11-1 Ground Continuity Test

1.) Using multimeter, ensure there is a ground continuity between the ground prong of the IPP power
connector and the arm ground cable connection.

IPP Power Connector System back

Ground prong

Figure 4-16 Ground Continuity test

Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks 4-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 5
Venue™Components and Function (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5
This chapter explains Venue™ system concepts, component arrangement, and sub-system functions.
It also describes the power distribution system, the cabling system and probes.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-2
General Information
5-2-1 Introduction

The Venue™ system is a compact ultrasound scanner that can be used with both phased array and
linear array ultrasound probes.

Weighing less than 70 kg (154.3 lb), the Venue™ ultrasound scanner is extremely versatile and -
depending upon the installed software - can be used for various imaging modes. These include:

• 2D Gray Scale and 2D Color Flow imaging

• M-Mode Gray Scale imaging
• Color M-Mode
• Doppler
• Different combinations of the above modes
The Venue™ system main hardware components are configured as illustrated in Figure 5-1.

Cockpit (monitor)

eTower
(Front End and Back End)

System Power Distribution

(PSU, MPB, Batteries)

Base

Figure 5-1 Venue™ System - Configuration of Main Hardware Components

NOTE: For a detailed description of Venue™ system operating modes, refer to the Venue™ User Manual.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The Venue™ ultrasound scanner has a software beam-forming system.

Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel, to the Front End (FE) Electronics, and to the Back End
Unit, are finally displayed on the cockpit (monitor).

5-2-1-1 System Configuration and Software

System configuration is stored on a hard disk drive inside the Back End Unit.

At power up, all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk.

5-2-1-2 Electronics
The Venue™ system internal electronics are divided into three:
• Front End Unit - see page 5 - 20
• Back End Processor - see page 5 - 24
• System Power Distribution - see page 5 - 27

Venue™ system internal electronics comprise an eTower that contains both the Front End Unit and the
Back End Unit. The Interconnecting signals between the two sections are routed internally via PCIe
cable. All the interconnections to the cockpit (monitor) and peripherals (data signals) are via the Back
End. All power signals are via the Main Power Board (MPB).

The design of the Venue™ ultrasound scanner comprises three main sections (illustrated in Figure 5-2):

• Cockpit (monitor) - comprises user interface section

• eTower - includes scanner electronic cards and assemblies

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Power Distribution - includes power supply unit and batteries compartment

Figure 5-2 Venue™ Ultrasound Scanner - System Design

Note:

Section 5-3
Options
• For a list of the available options, see Optional Peripherals .
• For descriptions of the options, see the User Manual.
• For Installation instructions, see: Options Setup .
• For configuration, see: Options Setup .

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-4
Connectivity
5-4-1 Purpose of this Section
This section describes communication and connection options between the Venue™ ultrasound
scanner and other devices in the Hospital Information System.

5-4-2 Stand-alone Venue™

In this case, images will most likely be reviewed from a removable media. If digital images are stored,
they should be saved directly to the removal media.

5-4-3 Direct Connection from Venue™ to a Review Workstation

In this case, the data is transferred from the Venue™ to a dedicated review workstation over an Ethernet
connection.

The connection may be done in one of these ways:

• Connection via a Local Area Network (LAN) - set up for this special use only
• Connection via the hospital network (Local Area Network - LAN or Wide Area Network - WAN)
The database on the review station is used as the master and images are stored directly to the review
station’s storage.

In this configuration the ultrasound scanner is just an intermediate acquisition unit which after
completion of a study, will not contain any patient information, measurements or images. The
acquisition can be done online or offline.

5-4-4 Venue™ and a DICOM Server in a Network

In this case, the Venue™ is configured to work with a DICOM server in a network environment. Usually,
this will be the hospital network.

Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the Venue™.

At the end of the examination the images are sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM spooler.

This scenario requires that Venue™ is configured to be connected to the DICOM server.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-5
InSite
5-5-1 Introduction
InSite ExC is your direct link with a GE HealthCare Online Service Engineer or Applications Support
Engineer, or a Request for Service via the InSite ExC link at the bottom of the display screen.

5-5-2 InSite ExC Icon

The InSite ExC icon is located under the Service Settings.

Figure 5-3 InSite ExC Icon

Clicking on the Icon brings up the InSite menu.

Figure 5-4 InSite Menu

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Menu Choices:

• Service Desktop
Opens the Common Service Desktop on the Venue™.
• Request For Service
Generates a request for service (RFS). Allows the customer to generate a Service or Apps request.
• Connect to GE HealthCare
Increase polling rate. Click this icon to increase the contact Poll Rate from 15 minutes to 15
seconds. The increased polling rate continues for 15 minutes.

5-5-3 Initiating a Request For Service

To initiate a Request For Service:

1.) Open the Insite menu

2.) Select Request For Service.

Figure 5-5 RFS window

3.) Fill in all fields marked with *

4.) Tap ’Submit’

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) The Request will be sent to the back office and a request number will be displayed.

5-5-4 RFS History

TO Access the RFS history:

1.) Open Insite menu

2.) Tap ’Request For Service’
3.) In the ’Contact GE HealthCare’ window tap on RFS History (located in the top right corner of
the window)

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-5-5 InSite Status

The Insite status is displayed in the indication panel. The InSite icon changes colors according to the
connectivity state.l

Table 5-2 InSite Icons

Icon Connection Status Additional information

System is not connected to back office N/A

System is connected to back office Connection in idle mode.

System is connected to back office System is being serviced by OLC

System may or may not be connected Distruptive mode is On

to back office

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-5-6 InSite Definitions

Here are definitions for the different InSite states:

Virtual Console Observation (VCO). Allows Technical Support to control Venue™ functionality
remotely.

Disruptive. Allows GE HealthCare’s Technical Support person to connect to your system via VCO, to
run diagnostics directly on your Venue™ system, and to collect system logs. When the system is in
Disruptive Mode, the icons are red. There are two disruptive states. If you see a telephone with a clock,
then the system is in Disruptive, Not Connected Mode. If you see a telephone with GE HealthCare, then
the system is in Disruptive, Connected Mode.

Non-Disruptive. Allows GE HealthCare’s Technical support person to look around on your system, but
cannot perform any service-related functions, depending on whether InSite has connected or not
connected. There are two Non-Disruptive states. If you see a black and white icon, InSite ExC is
activated, but not open for Technical Support access. If you see a yellow icon, InSite ExC is activated
and the Technical Support person can look around on your system, but cannot perform any service-
related functions.

Connected. InSite is connected.

Not Connected. InSite is not connected.

NOTE: When Disruptive mode has been activated or a diagnostic has been run, the system will notify the user
that a reboot is required to allow scanning.

5-5-7 Exiting InSite

To exit InSite, reboot your Venue™ system.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-6
My GE HealthCare Utilization reporting (APM)
5-6-1 Introduction
My GE HealthCare utilization reporting allows customers to receive machine data and asset
performance of their Ultrasound fleet. The Venue family software allows connection to GE back office
servers at no additional cost, however the customer must purchase My GE HealthCare app to utilize
the tools capabilities.

5-6-2 Configure iCenter

To set iCenter

1.) Login as admin user

2.) Configure RSVP (see 3-8-15 -RSVP Configuration)
3.) Navigate to Config >> Connectivity >>Dataflow
4.) Choose Utilization Reporting
5.) Check the box Allow machine data to be sent to GEHC back office
6.) Click the Apply' button to save changes.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-11

DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-6-3 Utilization Reporting

5-6-3-1 Introduction
This section describes Imaging Insights and My GE Healthcare reporting.

Figure 5-6 Configure Utilization Reporting

5-6-3-2 Imaging Insights

A 3rd party SW (server) that provides valuable data to the users/hospital admins about the usage
of the system.

Data is sent to the imaging insights server in DICOM format. The data is being sent so often (not limited
to actual images) with dummy data in various DICOM tags.

NOTE: Imagining Insights server is setup like any other DICOM destination.

5-6-3-3 My GE Healthcare Reporting

Provides information to help the customer manage their equipment maintenance, service
agreements, and entitlements.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory)

 DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-6-3-4 Configure Imaging Insights

To enable Imaging Insight:
1.) Navigate to Config >> Connectivity >>Dataflow
2.) Enable Imagining Insights dataflow (swipe button to the right side until it shows blue color).
3.) Enter the following data fields:
• IP Address
• Name
• AE title
• Port number
4.) Click on 'Check' to verify successful connection to the server.
5.) Click the Apply' button to save changes.

NOTE: Interval can be set to any value. Remember this value is just for the time period between exams
(data is regularly sent to imaging insights with images)

5-6-3-5 Configure My GE Healthcare Reporting

In order to use Mygehealthcare reporting, RSVP needs to be configured. and checkbox needs to
be checked:

Check box to
enable
MyGEHealthcare

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory)

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-7
Cockpit (Monitor) Module
5-7-1 General
The cockpit (monitor) supports the following operating systems: Windows 10.IoT 64 bit.

The cockpit (monitor) module contains the following elements:

• Four probe holders and gel cup holder

• Power ON/OFF touch button
• SLEEP mode indicator
• AC Power LED Indicator
• Speaker
• Auxiliary display
• Mechanical Interface to Arm module
• Light Sensors (x2)
• LCD display 19" 5:4 1280x1024 pixels
• Touch module - multi touch surface.

5-7-1-1 Probe Holders

The cockpit (monitor) contains four probe holders and one Gel Cup holder.

Probe Holder

Gel Cup Holder

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-1-2 Power On/Off Touch Button

The On/Off touch button is located in the upper right corner of the cockpit (monitor) to prevent accidental
activation.

Figure 5-7 Power On/Off Touch button

The system On/Off button has two colors for power status indication:

• Green: indicates system power on

• Orange: indicates system power off.
The On/Off touch button is sensitive to:

• A bare finger
• A Latex gloved hand
• A Latex gloved hand with ultrasound gel.

5-7-1-3 Sleep Mode Indicator

The Sleep Mode indicator is located in the upper left corner of the cockpit (monitor) to prevent accidental
activation.

Figure 5-8 Sleep Mode Indicator

The system Sleep Mode button has one color for sleep status indication:

• No color: Sleep mode is not activated

• Orange: Sleep mode is activated.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-1-4 AC Power LED Indicator

The AC Power LED indicator is located on the top bar of the cockpit (monitor).

When the scanner is connected, the AC Power LED indicator turns green.

Figure 5-9 AC Power LED Indicator

5-7-1-5 Cockpit (Monitor) LED Indicators States

Table 5-3 Cockpit (Monitor) LED Indicator Possible States

System State LED Indicators

No Power
¤ AC main power switch is off or power cord
is disconnected
¤ batteries are drained or disconnected.

System is Off
¤ AC main power switch is on and power
cord is connected

System is Off
¤ AC main power switch is off or power cord
is disconnected

System is On (on AC)

¤ AC main power switch is on and power
cord is connected

System is On (on Batteries)

¤ AC main power switch is off or power cord
is disconnected

System is in Standby (on AC)

¤ AC main power switch is on and power
cord is connected

System is in Standby (on Batteries))

¤ AC main power switch is off or power cord
is disconnected

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-1-6 LCD Display

The LCD display is a 19" LCD screen.

It comprises the following main components:

• LCD Panel
• LCD Controller
• Multi-Touch Surface
• Multi-Touch Controller
• Glass Layer

The Touch Screen supports the following functionality:

• Active on touch
• Activate on release
• Drag-and-drop
• Double-click
• Right-click

User interaction with the Touch Panel is by way of touching (tapping) the screen with one finger, or
swiping (sliding multiple fingers across the surface of the screen). The touch panel display is sensitive
to finger and latex gloved hand. In addition to facilitating quick selection of the applicable controls, these
actions enable smooth scrolling, browsing and scaling of the display, as required.

To facilitate comfortable positioning for the operator, the height of the Main Display can be adjusted as
required. For optimal viewing, the screen angle is adjustable; tilting may be between +0o and -50o

At the tilt of 45o, the tilt mechanism is automatically locked and the cockpit can be tilted by additional 5o
only. To release the tilt clocking mechanism, pull down the tilt and locking handle, located at the front
of the Venue™system, under the cockpit.

In order to optimize the display settings, a light-sensing device (ambient light sensors) located on the
Cockpit (monitor) front is used for measuring the ambient light. This data is processed by the main CPU
which adapts the display setting, accordingly.

5-7-1-7 Monitor - LCD Display Characteristics

Table 5-4 Touch Screen- LCD Display Characteristics

Item Value
Size 19 inch wide

Resolution 1280 x 1024

pixels (WSXGA)

Number of Bits Min 8 bits per color

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-1-8 Monitor - LCD Display Optical Characteristics

Table 5-5 Touch Screen - LCD Display Optical Characteristics

Item Value
Contrast Ratio Min 600

Horizontal Viewing Angle Min 170 degrees @ CR >10

Vertical Viewing Angle Min 170 degrees @ CR >10

5-7-1-9 LCD Controller and Touch Module Configuration Interface

5-7-1-9-1 Input Video Interface

A Display Port standard receptacle connector is used for carrying video signals and preparatory none
video signals.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-2 Auxiliary Display (AD) Module

The purpose of the Auxiliary display is to show indication to the user of remaining scanning time when
the system operates on batteries only.

The AD module is a graphic Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display (AMLCD) located on the top right
corner of the cockpit (monitor).

When the system is on standby or running, there is a battery readout screen on the upper right corner
of the display. The battery status display indicates the operational time remaining in hours and minutes.
It also shows a progress bar indicating the relative amount of remaining charge, and a background color
which depends on the remaining scanning time.

Figure 5-11 Auxiliary Display

5-7-2-1 Battery Status Indication

When the battery is charging:

• If the AC power cable is plugged-in, the AC mains power indicator is lit green and the battery is
being charged, until reaching full charge.
The background color of the battery status display changes according to the remaining operational time
as follows:

• Green: remaining operation time is more than 90 minutes.

• Yellow: remaining operation time is between 30 and 90.
• Red: remaining operation time is less than 30 minutes.
When using battery and less than 10 minutes of operational time remains, a message appears on
screen to remind the user to plug the AC cable to mains.

When using battery and less than 2 minutes of operational time remains, the system will initiate the End
Exam” phase, if required, to archive the current exam, and then the system will turn off.

5-7-3 Speaker
The Venue™ cockpit (monitor) includes one speaker (with self-contained amplifier) for delivering
Doppler Audio signals to the user.

The speaker is rated for at least 2 watts RMS acoustic output.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-8
External Input/Output
The Venue™ ultrasound scanner has a connection panel (located at the rear of the eTower) that can
host the connections illustrated below.

Figure 5-12 shows a view of the Venue™ ultrasound unit interface panel showing external peripheral/
accessory connectors.

1 2

Figure 5-12 View of the Venue™ Peripheral/Accessory Interface Panel

1 Ethernet LAN connector — 1000 Base-TX Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (3kV insulation)
2 Dual USB 3.0 connector (not insulated)
3 HDMI connector (not insulated)

NOTE: Non insulated I/O can be populated either by certified medical devices or a self powered device
(powered by the system, not by external AC). All other devices should be connected to the system by
means of additional insulation.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-9
Front End Unit
5-9-1 General Information
The Venue™ Front End Unit is designed to support the cSound SW beam-forming architecture for 128
channels.

The Front End Unit, located in the door of the Electronic Cage, comprises the following modules:

- Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS)

See Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS)

- Probe Selector Module (T-PSB)

For interconnection of probes - see Probe Selection Board (T-PSB)
- Control Front End (T-CFE) - includes embedded Transmit and Receive Modules
See Front End (T-CFE) Board and Back End Processor .

Figure 5-13

WARNING WHEN OPENING AND CLOSING THE ELECTRONIC CAGE ASSEMBLY, TAKE CARE
NOT TO DAMAGE THE CABLES CONNECTED TO THE BEP.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-9-2 Front End Interfaces

The Front End is connected to the Back End via the following Interfaces:

A High Speed Data and Control Cable that comprises:

• PCI-e channel for Setup and communication between the BEP and the DSP located on the T-
CFE Module via the PCI Bridge.
• PCI-e channel for Acquired Data Transfer between T-CFE and BEP.
• Control Signals between the BEP and T-CFE for power management and Status Monitoring.
• Power Cable connected between the MPB to the Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS).

The Front End Modules are connected via the following Interfaces:

• The 128 Transmit and Receive System channels are routed to the PSB via the T-CFE Module.
• The PSB is connected to the T-CFE via 3 connectors

The Interface between the T-CFE and the PSB modules consists of the following:

• Dedicated I2C channel for Board ID (VPD)

• Control Signals
• I2C channel for Probe ID Reading and PSB Debug Information.
• LVDS channels for Matrix Probe Setup and Status Reading
• PSB DC Supply
• Probe Low Voltage and High Voltage Supply

5-9-3 Signal Flow

The embedded TRX32 modules in the Front End transmit pulses, routed through the Probe Selection
Board (PSB) to ultrasound probes.

Ultrasound echoes returned from a body structure are received by the probes and routed via the
PSB Board to the T-CFE2 board which amplify the signals. Then the signals are A/D converted. The
digitized signal is transferred via the PCIe 8x Bus to the Back End Processor for software beamforming
and further signal processing.

The Back End Processor receives input commands from the User Interface (Operator Panel), handles
the communication with the rest of the system, and delivers signals (digital video) to the LCD screen
and the Touch Screen. It also provides output to an optional, internal printer. The communication to the
network (Ethernet) is also handled by the Back End Processor.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-9-4 Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS)

The T-FEPS Module comprises the following sections:

• Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

• High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

5-9-5 Front End (T-CFE) Board

The function of the T-CFE interface is to transmit/receive all the channels data signals to/from the TRX
modules embedded in the T-CFE2 board. In addition, it contains all the control and status lines required
for HV MUX Setup, Probe selection and reading Probe status and information.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-9-6 Probe Selection Board (T-PSB)

The Probe Selection Board (T-PSB) enables acquisition and processing of signals from and to probes
connected to the front panel.

The main purpose of the T-PSB is to select the active probe and transfer the probe data to the T-CFE
Board. The PSB provides a mechanical and electrical interface for 4 RS probes.

The T-PSB supports the following:

• Probes with up to 128 elements, directly.
• 192 element probes, using on-board HV multiplexers.
The PSB receives all the required control lines from the T- CFE2 board. The analog receive/ transmit lines
are routed to the T-CFE board using two dedicated connectors. A third connector is used for power and
control.

5-9-6-1 T-PSB Default Mode

After Venue™ system power-up, the T-PSB automatically enters default mode. In this mode, the
following states are applicable:

• No connector is selected.
• High voltage supplies to all probes are disconnected.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-10
Back End Processor
5-10-1 Introduction
The Back End Processor (BEP), which supports the operation of the Venue™ ultrasound unit and is the
main controller for the system, comprises the following modules:

• Back End Processing (BEP) Module

• Solid State Hard Drive

Figure 5-14 BEP Interfaces

5-10-2 Back End Processing (BEP) Module

The Main BEP module is the System Computer responsible for operating the Venue™ Scanner
application under a Windows 10 operating system.

The BEP board contains the following Interfaces:

• Expansion: PCI Express x16

• USB: USB 2.0 & USB 3.0
• Video: Digital video outputs
• Audio: Digital audio output and analog audio input/output.
• SSD/HDD: SATA3 interface
• SDRAM Memory: DDR3/DDR4: 2xSODIMM
• LAN: 2x 10/100/1000Mbits/s LAN

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

For information on cables connected to the BEP Module, see Figure 8-35

Figure 5-15 BEP Board Interfaces

BEP-to-Front End (T-CFE) Interface is via the Data and Control Cable that contains the following:

• PCI-e channels
• Control and Status signals between the BEP and the Front End.
BEP Interface Panel- this panel allows external connections of multiple interfaces by extension cables
that connects the internal ports to the IP panel.

• The BEP Interface Panel is located on the rear side of the Venue™ ultrasound scanner, and
contains the following connectors:
• HDMI port - supports connection of external monitor
• 2 USB 3.0 ports - support for external USB devices such as Bar-code reader etc.
• RJ45 - Ethernet port: supports wired network connection.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-10-3 Back End Interface (BIB) Board

The purpose of the Back End Board (BIB) module is to unify communications from all the boards in the
system and redirect them to their relevant destinations.

The Back End Board (BIB) module, responsible for the scanner Interfaces, comprises three main
Interfaces:

• Back End (mITX standard)- via the Docking Interface

• Csound Front End (CFE) Board
• Main Power Board (MPB)

5-10-4 Solid State Hard Drive

The Hard Disk is the main storage device of the Venue™ ultrasound unit. The Hard Disk, which is
controlled by the CPU via signals from the SATA Bus.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-11
System Power Distribution
5-11-1 Introduction
The Venue™ system power distribution consists of the following modules:

• An Isolated AC/DC Power supply to all System modules (18v/400W) called the PSU Unit.
• Optional Battery Packs that supplies Power to the system when AC power line is not present or in
the event of AC power failure (12-16.8V).
• Input filter unit, IPP, before PSU, for filtering AC line noises.

5-11-2 AC Distribution
The PSU module converts the AC power line (100-240V AC) to 18V DC @ 400 W. this module is the
main power supply for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner:

5-11-3 DC Power Distribution

The main DC Power supplied from the PSU (AC/DC) is distributed by the MPB to the following system
modules:

• Back End Module.

• Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS).
• Cockpit (Monitor)
• Battery charging
• Peripherals

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-11-4 System Power Management

The System Power Management is responsible for operating the system in different power states, in
accordance with the power condition and User request.

System Power Management comprises the following:

• The PSU Module, responsible for the following functions:

• Convert 100 - 240V AC to Isolated 18V DC power supply
• The MPB module is responsible for the following:
• Battery Charger controlled by the SOM
• Automatic Switching from AC power line (18V DC after conversion by PSU) and battery power
(12v-16.8v)
• The Embedded Controller (SOM), is responsible for the following functions:
• Control the power-up and wake-up sequences
• Battery Monitoring and Battery Charger control
• Interface to the PSU
• Interface to the T-CFE Power sequencing and Monitoring Device
• Back End Thermal Management

5-11-5 Rechargeable Battery Pack

The battery pack consists of Li-Ion cells, protection and fuel gauge electronics, and connectors.

The battery module consists of 3 batteries bound together by plastic brackets. All battery packs are
electrically isolated.

• The main functions of the battery fuel gauge are:

• Charge and discharge operation
• Battery pack fuel gauging (PIC16F886)
• Resettable primary protection (over voltage, under voltage, and discharge over current).
• Non resettable secondary protection (over voltage and FET over-temperature).

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-28

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5-11-5-1 Battery - General Safety Guidelines

The lithium ion rechargeable battery packs provides power to the Venue™ system whenever an AC
power source is not available.

Venue™ ultrasound scanner is supplied with two battery packs installed in the battery bay as standard.
Each battery pack includes three lithium ion batteries bounded in plastic enclosure.

The Venue™ has built-in charger functionality and switches automatically from battery operation to AC
operation and vice versa.

When shutting down the system, leave the main power cable connected to keep the battery fully charged.

NOTE: Before removing or inserting the Battery, perform system shut-down and disconnect the AC power
cable from the Venue™ ultrasound scanner.

NOTE: The lithium ion technology used in the system's battery is significantly less hazardous to the
environment than the lithium metal technology used in some other batteries.

NOTE: The battery is designed to be replaced every 2 years.

CAUTION THE BATTERY IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH VENUE™ SYSTEMS ONLY.

ONLY USE THE BATTERIES AUTHORIZED BY GE HealthCare.

- Do not disassemble or alter it. Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is
between 0 °C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F) and discharge the batteries between -20 °C and
50 °C (-4 °F and 122 °F).
- Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the battery terminals with metal objects.
- Do not heat the battery or incinerate.
- Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60 °C (140 °F). Keep it away from fire and
other heat sources.
- Do not charge the battery near a heat source, e.g. fire or heaters.
- Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.
- Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
- Do not use a damaged battery. Do not solder a battery.
- Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet.
- Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.
- Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container. If the battery leaks or
emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
- If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears abnormal
during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it.
- If you have any questions about the battery, consult GE HealthCare or your local
representative.

Recommended storage conditions of battery pack:

Short term (less than one month): 0 °C (32 °F) to 50 °C (122 °F)

Long term (more than three months): -20 °C (-4 °F) to 20 °C (68 °F).

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-12
Cooling System
5-12-1 General Information
The Venue™ system has 3 fans for system cooling:

• Back End Fan - located on the Back End module.

• T-CFE Fan - located on the top of the Front End module.
• MPB Blower (Fan) - located on the on the rear side of the system behind the MPB module.

All fans are controlled and have variable speed.

The cooling requirement for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner with monitor and on board peripherals, is
up to 2000 BTU/h. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in
the room.

NOTE: Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/h demand on the cooling system.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-30

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-13
Peripherals
5-13-1 Internal Peripheral

5-13-1-1 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer

The B/W Printer, available as an option. The printer is mounted at the front side of the Venue™
ultrasound scanner.

5-13-1-2 ECG Module

The ECG module, available as an option. The module is responsible for the acquisition of the ECG
analog signal inputs.

CAUTION USE ONLY APPROVED, DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF ECG PATIENT CABLES, SEE Table 9-4-11.

5-13-2 External Peripherals

5-13-2-1 Wi-Fi Adapter

The Wi-Fi adapter allows the user to connect the system to network wireless.

The Wi-Fi adapter is connected at the back side of the cockpit (monitor) via a L shape USB adapter.

5-13-2-2 Bar-code reader

The bar code reader allows the user scanning patient ID from a printed bar code label and scanning
needle type bar code.

The bar code reader is connected to the Venue system via a USB port located on the rear.

This page was intentionally left blank.

Chapter 5 - Venue™Components and Function (Theory) 5-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
6-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 6
This chapter explains that there are no service adjustments required on a Venue™ .

Section 6-2
Power Supply Adjustments
There are no adjustments on the power supply.

The DC Power is self-regulated.

If a voltage is outside the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply
itself or with one (or more) of the units connected to that specific power outlet.

When an error occurs, the power will be turned OFF immediately.

Section 6-3
Cockpit (Monitor) Adjustments
There are no adjustments required on the Cockpit (monitor).

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-4
Articulated Arm Movement Adjustments
6-4-1 Arm Movement Adjustment - General Instructions
1.) The cockpit adjustment movement resistance may be increased/decreased in the following axes
(red arrow shows location of the controlling screw per axis):

Figure 6-16 Optional Movement Resistances Adjustments

6-4-2 Tilt Resistance Adjustments

1.) At the back of the cockpit, disconnect the Wi-Fi dongle if exists: release four screws and remove
the transparent cover and the Wi-Fi dongle

Figure 6-17 Wi-Fi Cover and Dongle Removal

2.) Remove the cockpit rear cover if exists: disconnect four screws using appropriate Phillips
screwdriver.

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 6-18 Cockpit Rear Cover Removal

3.) Using 8mm Allen key and 19mm open wrench release/tighten the Allen screw.

Figure 6-19 Tilt Movement Adjustment

NOTE: Ensure there is no tilt autonomic movement.

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6-4-3 Pan (Swivel) Resistance Adjustments:

1.) Tighten/Release the 8mm socket at the back of ..

Figure 6-20 Pan Movement Adjustment

NOTE: Ensure there is no pan (swivel) autonomic movement.

6-4-4 Arm Vertical Movement Adjustments:

1.) Move the cockpit to one side, until the Alen screw inside the arm is accessible.

Figure 6-21 Arm Vertical Movement Adjustment

2.) Using a 5mm Alen key tighten/release the Alen screw.

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE: Ensure there is no arm autonomic movement.

6-4-5 Arm Rotate Resistance Adjustments:

1.) At the back of the system, release the nut under the riser cover,

Figure 6-22 Arm Rotate Movement Adjustment

2.) Tighten or release the 4mm Allen screw to adjust the required arm movement resistance
NOTE: Ensure there is no arm autonomic movement.

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Section 7-1
Overview
7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7
This chapter describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality
and system operation. Very basic host, system and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is
applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF

CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS
EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

If the covers are removed from an operating Venue™ ,

some metal surfaces may be warm enough to pose a
potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shutdown
mode.

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as

gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to
reduce the risk of injury.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-2-1 System Diagnostics

a.) On the Home screen tap: Settings >> Service >> Diag.

Figure 7-23 Running Diagnostics

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-3
Gathering Troubleshooting Data
7-3-1 Purpose of this Section
Trouble images and system data (logs) can be acquired at the device or through remote diagnostics
(InSite). These data can be used to perform service at the device, or can be sent back to the
manufacturer for analysis.

7-3-2 Collect Vital System Information

The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:

• Product Name = Venue™

• Select Config (F2) > About screen.
• Applications Software
- Application Software revision
- Software medium’s part number
• System Software
- System Software revision
- Software medium’s part number

7-3-3 Collect a ‘Trouble Image’ with Logs

On the Home screen tap: Settings >> Log >> Logs.

Figure 7-24 Venue™ R2 Systems - Accessing Diagnostics Screen

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-4
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE: You MUST select one of the available devices as the destination device if it is to be different than the
default Export directory on the hard drive.

The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.

1. Type description of issue here 5. Progress bar

2. Select if you’ve had a system lockup (after 6. See: Advanced Log Options .
restart) 7. See: Advanced Log Options .
3. Select where to store the report 8. Exit
4. Select this button when ready to Save and
Export

Figure 7-25 System Problem Reporting (ALT+D dialog box)

7-3-3-1 Advanced Log Options

• Extensive Log enables the creation of a log file containing additional information for the selected
functionality.
• Options enables creation of a log file based on a selected bookmark or for a user configurable time
frame. Different type of information can be selected to be part of the log file.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-4

RSVP Service Desktop

7-4-1 Disruptive mode
Disruptive mode is a way to control interruptions to operation of the system. Disruptive mode is required
whenever service performs a function that may disrupt a normal scan.

Disruptive mode is required to run diagnostics, clean presets, and reset the patient database, and turn
on Virtual Console Observation (VCO).

• When Disruptive mode is On, all service functionality on the Service desktop is allowed but user
operation of the system may be limited.
• When Disruptive mode is Off, some service functionality on the Service desktop is not available
and user operation of the system is normal.
• The ability to enable Disruptive mode depends on the logged in user access level:
• Local user - a user locally logged into the machine will not be able to set the Disruptive
mode. Local user can only allow a Disruptive mode request from a remote user through
the Service desktop. The local user must have Authorize Remote Service Access to allow
Disruptive mode. If the local user does not have this right, the remote user’s request will
be automatically denied.
• Remote user - a user remotely accessing the system will not be able to automatically
switch on the Disruptive mode. The local user has to grant remote access.
• The local user will be notified through a dialog box and asked to allow Disruptive mode.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-2 Color Status

Throughout the Service desktop, colors indicate the following:

• Green - Status is normal

• Orange - Indicates a warning
• Red - Indicates an error

7-4-3 Licenses
With Service Basic Access (Class A), these are the available options:

• HOME
• Utilities
• Change Password
• Delete Files
• Gather Logs
• Network Capture
• Thirty Party Licenses

• Options
• Agent Configuration

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4 Home Screen

Home configurations vary depending upon the purchased service level

Figure 7-26 Home Screen for class A

7-4-4-1 System Information

System Information displays general information about the system. When the system has been
successfully configured to connect to the back office, these elements will have the corresponding
values:

• Agent Registered will be Yes

• Agent Quarantine will be No
• Agent CRM Verified will be Yes

Note: The information on System Information is available to all service class licenses.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7-27 System Information

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

This table shows all the elements available on System Information with descriptions.
Table 7-2 System Information

Element DESCRIPTION

CRM Number Customer Relationship Management (CRM) number.

System identifier assigned to the customer unit by the service region.
Agent Registered Registered status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent is registered in the back office.
• No - The agent is not registered in the back office.
• Not Available - The agent is not running or has not been configured.
Agent Quarantine Quarantine status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent has more than one device registered with the same CRM Number
in the back office.
• No - The agent has one device registered with the listed CRM Number in the back
office.
• Not Available - The agent is not running or has not been configured.
Agent CRM Verified CRM verified status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent is verified in the back office.
• No - The agent is not verified in the back office.
• Not Available - The agent is not running or has not been configured.
Model Number GE HealthCare part number of the system. Same number as listed on the
rating plate
Serial Number Serial number of the system. The same number as listed on the rating plate.
System Type Product name
Facility Name of the hospital or facility where the system is installed

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-2 Software Status

Use Software Status to view general information about the software installed on the system.

Note: The information on Software Status is available to all service class licenses.

Figure 7-28 Software Status

The following table lists all the elements available on Software Status section.
Table 7-3 Software Status

Element DESCRIPTION
System Date Current date in the format: <day>, <month> <year>.
System Time Local time based on the last time the system desktop was refreshed in
the format <hh:mm:ss>.
Application Installation Date Date the application software was installed.
Base Image Installation Date Date the base image software was installed. The base image software
includes the operating system and other supporting software.
Base Image Version Version number of the base image software.

Application Software Version Version number of the application software.

Application Status Status of the application. Valid values are
• Running
• Stopped

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-3 Connected Probes

Connected Probes shows probes connected to the system.

Note: The information on Connected Probes is available to all service class licenses.

Figure 7-29 Connected Probes

The following table lists all the elements available on Connected Probes section:
Table 7-4 Connected Probes

Element DESCRIPTION

Active Probe Tempera- When available, temperature of the active probe.

ture (Celsius) Relevant for TEE probe.
Probe Name Name of the probe connected to the system
Probe ID Identifier of the probe connected to the system.
Serial Number Serial number of the probe connected to the system. If the serial number of
the probe is not available, then N/A will be displayed.
Status Statuses of the probe connected to the system. Valid values are:
• Active
• Non Active

7-4-4-4 Gather Logs

Gather Logs provides a way to collect system logs and place the log files in the D:\Service directory for
retrieval by the online center. Log files are compressed into a zip file and the file path and name display.

Note: The Gather Logs is available to all service class licenses.

To access the Gather Logs utility:

1.) Tap Utility on the top bar and select Gather Logs
2.) Select one of the following:
• 1 Day Logs
• 1 Week Logs
• All Logs
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-12
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Click Gather Logs. In the resulting dialog box, record the location of the log files and click OK.
• When the gather log operation is complete, click the notification icon in the banner to view
the location of the log files.

Figure 7-30 Gather Logs

7-4-4-5 Delete Files

Delete Files displays all the files and folders present in the D:\Service folder and allows for their
deletion. Deleting unneeded files improves performance and reduces the need to defragment the disk
drive.

Note: The Delete Files utility is available to all service class licenses.

Figure 7-31 Delete Files

The following table lists all the elements available on Delete Files section:
Table 7-5 Delete Files

Element DESCRIPTION
Delete Files Displays the files that are available for deletion.

Delete Deletes the selected files.

To delete files:

1.) From the Top menu bar, Tap: Utilities >> Delete Files.
2.) Under Delete Files, select the available folders and files that you want to delete.
3.) Click Delete.
4.) In the resulting dialog box, click Delete and then click OK.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-6 Change Password

Change Password allows you to change the password for a specified user type.

CAUTION: IF THE PASSWORD IS LOST, GE HealthCare WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RECOVER OR

RESET IT.LOSS OF A PASSWORD MAY RESULT IN THE LOSS OF PATIENT DATA.

Note: The Change Password utility is available to all service class licenses.

Change Password is not available through a remote connection.

To access Change Password, From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Change Password.

Figure 7-32 Change Password

The following table lists all the elements available on Change Password screen:
Table 7-6 Change Password

Element DESCRIPTION

User Type Type of user for the password reset.

New Password Password
Confirm Password. Password
Update Password Select to update the password.

Reset Select to reset the information.

To change the password:

1.) From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Change Password.
2.) Under User Type, select the user.

Note: Before changing the GEService password, make sure that the system is connected to the
network and the agent is configured. The GEService password is used to perform portions of
remote service. If the password is changed and the system information is not updated, it may
slow down remote service. Both file transfer and SSH depend on the GEService password.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) In New Password and Confirm Password, enter the new password.

CAUTION: GE HealthCare WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RECOVER OR RESET CHANGED

PASSWORDS.SECURELY RECORD THE NEW PASSWORD.

4.) Click Update Password.

5.) When a GEService user password has been changed, reboot the system to reflect the
password change.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-7 Third Party Software Licenses

Third Party Software Licenses displays the third-party software licenses used as part of the service
platform.

Note: The Change Password utility is available to all service class licenses.

To access Third Party Software Licenses From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Third Party
Software Licenses.

Figure 7-33 Third Party Software Licenses

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-9 Network Capture

Network Capture displays network traffic between the system and configured devices. A network
capture outputs two log files:
one for main logging with no protected information and another including protected information. These
log files are useful when debugging connectivity issues. Because these log files can be large, they are
only kept for one week.

To access Network Capture, From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Network Capture.

Figure 7-35 Network Capture

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The following table lists all the elements available on Network Capture screen:

Table 7-8 Network Capture

Element DESCRIPTION
Network Capture Parameters
Maximum Size Allowed size of the generated log file. Valid value
are:
• 256MB
• 512MB
• 1024MB
Devices DICOM-configured devices for which you want to
capture information. If no additional devices are
configured, only All will be available.
Start Network Capture Select to start the process. This causes the network capture to start, enables
the Stop button, and updates the Network Capture Status pane and chang-
es the Status to Running.
Stop Network Capture Select to stop the process.
Network Capture Status

Displays information about the status of the

network capture. The language setting for this
information is set in Windows and not through the
Service desktop or Vivid iq application software.
Displays the current status of the network capture.
Valid values are:
• Not Running
• Running

To perform a network capture:

1.) From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Network Capture.
2.) From Network Capture, do the following:
• Under Maximum Size, select the allowed size of the generated log file.
• Under Devices, select the DICOM-configured device for which you want to capture
information. If no additional devices are configured, only All will be available.
3.) Select Start Network Capture to start the process. This causes the network capture to start,
enables the Stop button, and updates the Network Capture Status panel and changes the
Status to Running.
4.) Click the Stop button to end data collection. Stopping is a two-step process:
- Stops the data collection and immediately closes the XXX.etl file.
- Collects additional diagnostic data that may help diagnose network issues. When the file is
closed, you see “There is no trace session currently in progress”. When the remaining data is
collected and the XXX.cab file is closed, you are notified in the banner.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-10 Options
Use Options to:

• View software options

• View software option details.

• Add (or delete) a valid option key, add a duplicate option key, not add an invalid option key, and ask
for confirmation before deleting an option key.

• View software option key details. Key details are a list of options that are enabled by a particular key.
Under Available Keys, highlight the option string, select Details and then view the options on the left
side of the screen. Press Show All to view all of the activated options.

Note: The Options utility is available to all service class licenses.

To access Options, From the Top Menu bar, tap Utilities >> Options.

Figure 7-36 Options

The following table lists all the elements available on Options screen:
Table 7-9 Options

Element DESCRIPTION
Software Options
Option Software options on the system

Status Status of the options on the system

Software Option Details
Product Name of the product.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7-9 Options

Hardware Number Number for the hardware. The hardware number is the hash of the serial
number that is used to generate the option key.
Serial Number Serial number of the system
Software Option Keys

Available Keys List of the option keys installed on the system

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-4-4-11 Agent Configuration

Use Agent Configuration to:

• Edit and configure the following:

• Enterprise host name in the agent

• Enterprise port number in the agent

• Proxy server in the agent

• Proxy port in the agent

• CRM number in the agent

• Display name in the agent

• Set the serial number in the agent

• Enter the user name and password for the proxy

• Reset the edited unsaved value

• Update contact details

Note: The Agent Configuration utility is available to all service class licenses.

Figure 7-37 Agent Configuration

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The following table lists all the elements available on Agent Configuration screen:
Table 7-10 Agent Configuration

Element DESCRIPTION

Agent Configuration
Contact Details Phone number for the person at the customer site a GE HealthCare remote
service engineer would contact. The phone number is entered during instal-
lation and reviewed at every service call to make sure the information is cor-
rect.
Agent Status Status for the agent. Valid values are:
• Running
• Not Running
Agent Registered Registered status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent is registered in the back office.
• No - The agent is not registered in the back office.
• Not Available - The agent is not configured or running.
Agent Quarantine Quarantine status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent has more than one device registered with the same CRM
Number in the back office. This scanner cannot send data back to GE
HealthCare or be remotely accessed.
• No - The agent has one device registered with the listed CRM Number in
the back office.
• Not Available - The agent is not configured or running.
Agent CRM Verified CRM verified status of the agent. Valid values are:
• Yes - The agent is verified in the back office.
• No - The agent is not verified in the back office.
• Not Available - The agent is not configured or running.
Agent Model Number GE HealthCare part number for the system. The same number as listed on
the rating plate.
Serial Number Serial number of the agent (read-only). If the agent is not registered with a
serial number, this field is populated with the serial number of the system.
The serial number of the agent is tied to the serial number of the system.
CRM No Customer Relationship Management (CRM) number. System identifier as-
signed to the customer unit by the service region. CRM is pre-populated by
adding system to the CRM number. The CRM number of the system is ed-
itable.
Display Name Displayed name of the agent.
Advanced Configuration

Enterprise Server Name of the enterprise server.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-23
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7-10 Agent Configuration

Enterprise Host Number of the enterprise host.

Enterprise Port Number of the enterprise port

Proxy Configuration
Enable Proxy Enables the proxy server.
Proxy Server When Enable Proxy is selected, name of the proxy server IP.
Proxy Port When Enable Proxy is selected, number of the proxy server port.

Credentials
Enable Proxy Enables the proxy credentials.
Credentials
Username When Enable Proxy Credentials is selected, name of the user.
Password When Enable Proxy Credentials is selected, password for the user.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-5
Probe Check
7-5-1 Background
The Probe check is based on transmitting and receiving an ultrasound signal through the probe
elements to be able to diagnose if there are defective probe elements

The result of the Probe check is pass/fail.

Probe check tool can run automatically at first probe connection or manually through the probe selector
button.

Note: Automatic Probe check can be enabled/disabled in the config pages.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-1-1 Using the Probe Check Tool:

Note: Before running the tool, verify that the probe to be tested is thoroughly clean from any dirt/gel
etc.

1.) Connect the probe to any RS probe connector on the back side of the system.:

Figure 7-38 Probe Connector Numbering

2.) Select a probe from the probe selection menu and click on ’Probe Check’ button.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-1-2 Pass result

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-1-3 Failed result

Note: It is possible to keep scanning with a fail result on a specific probe at the users discretion.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-28

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-6
e-Delivery
7-6-1 Purpose of this Section
In this section you will find e-Delivery procedures and hints.

7-6-2 Introduction
e-Delievery is available for customers who purchased the eDelivery HCAT.

Having this capability allows the users to receive notification emails upon the release of new SW
available for their Venue family ultrasound system and to download it from the GE HealthCare portal.

Before you start downloading your SW, make sure you have your entitlement credentials.

7-6-3 Accessing GE HealthCare portal and downloading SW

7-6-3-0-1 How to download software image from Flexera portal:

3.) You will get a mail from eDelivery admin system with your username and initial password for login.
You will be required to change your password when login with this password.

4.) Enter the Flexnet portal:

https://gehealthcare.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal/startPage.do

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Login to your account

6.) From Recent Entitlements, select your venue family product

7.) Select the Image USB tool and the MD5Summer files.Select the relevant SW version (the SW
image filename contains the SW mediaPN):

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-30

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) 2 ways are available to download the files. You may need to install an adds-on if you are using this
tool first time

9.) Once the SW image file download process ends, run the MD5Summer utility(MD5Summer.exe),
click OK if this window is shown:

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10.)Browse to the folder to which you have downloaded the SW image file (.bin) and select “Create
sums”
11.)Select the .bin file and click on Add

12.)Click OK to start calculating the MD5 checksum:

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-32

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Verify that the calculated MD5 is identical to the value displayed in Flexera portal.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-6-4 Burning Disk-on-Key Media with SW Downloaded from GE HealthCare Portal

Table 7-11 ImageUSB System Requirements

Requirement Description

Windows XP SP3, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server

Operating System 2008, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10

Memory (RAM) 256 MB or more.

3 MB of free space for installation, plus additional space required to store an

Hard Disk Space image file.

NOTICE The minimum required size of the disk-on-key to be used must be 32GB.

1.) Browse to the downloaded file location and run the ImageUSB.exe file.
2.) If the Windows User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes to allow the program to make
changes to your computer.
3.) The ImageUSB by PassMark Software main window appears.

Figure 7-39 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - ImageUSB Main Window

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-34

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) In the Step 1 section, select the correct target USB.

Figure 7-40 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Select Target USB

5.) In the Step 2 section, select the Write image to USB drive check box.

Figure 7-41 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Write Image to USB Drive

6.) In the Step 3 section, click Browse and select the image-file (in BIN format) downloaded from the
GE HealthCare Portal.

Figure 7-42 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Write Image to USB Drive

7.) In the Step 4 section, click Write to start the burning process.

Figure 7-43 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Write Image to USB Drive

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-35

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Click Yes in the dialog boxes that appear to continue the burning process.

Figure 7-44 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Confirmation and Warning Messages

9.) View the burning progress in the Overall progress status bar.

Figure 7-45 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Progress Status Bar

10.)If the software burning process is successfully completed, the Imaging Completed message
appears. Click OK to close the notification window.

Figure 7-46 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Imaging Completed Message

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-36

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

11.)If the burning process fails, a notification window appears. Click OK to close the window.

Figure 7-47 Disk-on-Key Burn Process - Imaging Failed Message

Repeat steps 3 - 9 using different USB media.

12.)Exit the ImageUSB utility.
13.)Proceed with the Software Update Procedure section, page 8-189.

7-6-5 Obtain SW update directly through RSVP

This section describes the steps for obtaining an updated SW directly from RSVP.

NOTE: This option is accessible for Admin users only!

7-6-5-1 Verify WIFI and RSVP connectivity

1) Verify the system has WIFI connection
2) Verify the system is connected to RSVP, see 3-8-15 -RSVP Configuration
3) Check if a new SW is available and access the Update center screen, by either:
• Pressing the green indication arrow showing a new SW version is available:

Figure 7-48 Update Center screen: New SW update is available

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-37

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• By clicking on Update Center in the pop-up message indicating a new SW is available:

Figure 7-49 Update Center screen: New SW update is available

7-6-5-2 Download and install the new SW

1) In the Update Center screen, when a dialogue announces Updates are available - click on the
Update Center button

Figure 7-50 Click on the Update Center button

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-38

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2) Select the new SW package from the presented list, and click on Download

Figure 7-51 Select package and click on Download

3) In the warning message that appears, check the box and select Download

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-39

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Note: The system will not be operational during SW download!

Figure 7-52 Select the checkbox and click on Download

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-40

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4) When status is Ready to install Click on Install

Figure 7-53 Click on Install

5.) The system will backup the current SW before installing the new one, as follows

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-41

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6) Select the destination folder for the backup and click Begin Backup

Figure 7-54 Click on Begin Backup

7) Wait until the backup in progress bar is replaced by the backup is complete message.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-42

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Note: You may stop the backup process by clicking Stop Backup

Figure 7-55 Wait while backup is in progress

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-43

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8) When the Backup complete dialogue appears, check the box and click Install

Figure 7-56 Check the box and select Install

Note: The system will not be operational during SW installation

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-44

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9) Wait until the Installation in progress indication completes.

Figure 7-57 Wait while update installation is in progress

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-45

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-6-5-3 To Rollback and install the previous (backed-up) SW

1) In the Update Center screen, from the displayed packages, select the package to which you would
like to rollback, and click the Rollback button.

Figure 7-58 Select the package to be reverted to, and click Rollback

2) In the displayed dialog, click on the Rollback button

Figure 7-59 Click on the Rollback button

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-46

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-6-5-4 To upload SW from USB

1) Enter your DOK into the system port.
2) In the Update Center screen, click on the USB Download button

Figure 7-60 Click on the USB Download button

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-47

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3) Select the source of the package from the roll-down screen, check the box and click on Import

Figure 7-61 Select package and click on Download

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-48

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4) Wait while the import progress bar is indicating the progress

Figure 7-62 Wait while progress bar indicates importing

Note: You may stop the import by clicking Stop Import.

5) When the import process ends, you may now select and install the imported package, see 7-6-5-2

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-49

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

-Download and install the new SW

Figure 7-63 Select package and click on Download

4.)

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-50

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-7
Noise Troubleshooting
7-7-1 Purpose of this Section
In this section you will find Noise troubleshooting procedures and hints.

7-7-2 Introduction
Before you start troubleshooting the noise, you should read the following subsections:

• EMI Limitations
• EMI Prevention/Abatement
• Accessing GE HealthCare portal and downloading SW - see below

When talking to the customer, try to gather as much information as possible about the conditions when
the noise appear:

Is the noise present...

… all the time?

… after some time of use? (After how long time?)

… at special times of the day (or night)? When?

… at all locations in the hospital, or only in one room/area?

… from time to time, no special pattern of time is observed?

7-7-3 Overview of Types of Noise

There are different types of noise. Use the information next to classify the noise and possible cause.

7-7-3-1 Noise Picked Up from the Air

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air.

If picked up by a probe cable, the noise will be coherent -“penlight noise” pointing down in the picture -
due to the fact that the noise is received on all channels.

• Is it a problem on one probe only?

Try another probe.

• Is it a problem on one of the probe connectors only?

Move the scanner to another location and verify any changes.

7-7-3-2 Noise Received via the External Cables

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the wiring.
The noise can enter the system via the mains power cable, probe cable(s) or any other external
connected cable(s).
To troubleshoot this type of noise, disconnect cables that are not needed for the basic use of the
scanner. Check for any change in the noise each time a cable has been disconnected from the
Venue™ .
• Network cable

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-51

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Cables to any external peripherals

• Other cables connected to the Patient I/O
Verify if the noise change or disappear when the cables are removed.
Often, this type of noise is due to grounding problems in the mains power system or that the scanner is
sharing a power line with other equipment.

7-7-3-3 Intermittent Noise

• Is there any equipment that is turned on and off near the scanner?
• Is the noise present all around the clock or only at special occasions?

7-7-3-4 Self-generated Noise Generated inside the Ultrasound system)

Example: Color Noise in the near field.
• Self generated noise will not change if you touch the scanner or the probe.
• Self generated noise may be due to either:
• heat problems
• hardware problems
• software problems

7-7-3-5 Heat Problems

Heat problems are usually starting when the Venue™ has been ON for some time.

If the Venue™ has been used for scanning for some time before the noise appears, it may be due to either
heat problems or some software related issues. By doing a restart you may learn some more about the
cause.

Connect an external USB keyboard and click Ctrl+Alt+R to restart the back end processor without
power-cycling the unit.

• If the noise is present after the restart, the cause is most likely due to heat problems.
• If the noise is gone after the restart, it may be due to either the setup/adjustments or a software
failure.
Possible causes for heat problems:

• Room temperatures outside the allowed temperature limits.

• Fans are worn-out.
• Hardware problems.

7-7-3-6 Hardware Problems

A hardware issue will typically be an error/malfunction on a card.

7-7-3-7 Software Problems

Check if a newer software version is available. A software update may include noise fixes. If needed,
update the software.

7-7-4 Different Power Outlet

Connect the unit to another power outlet and verify if the noise changes or disappear.

NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This
dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the Ultrasound system.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-52

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The Venue™ will function on voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power in North America, then a center tapped power source is required.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

7-7-5 Different System

Try another Venue™ scanner at the same location and look for the same noise. If the noise is present
on the new system too, the noise is most likely from an external source/equipment.

7-7-6 Different Location

Move the scanner to another location and verify if the noise changes or disappear. This may help you
to locate an external noise source.

Try to move the scanner to:

• another location inside the room

• another room
• another floor

7-7-7 Disconnect External Cables

Disconnect all external cables (network and all unused probes), and verify if the noise disappears.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-53

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-8
Audio Troubleshooting
7-8-1 Purpose of this Section
In this section you will find Audio troubleshooting procedures and hints, to be used if there is no Doppler
or system sound.

7-8-2 Audio Troubleshooting Procedure

1.) In the application:
1.) Enter config ->system ->settings
2.) Make sure that the mute control sounds is not checked

Figure 7-64 Verify Mute Control is NOT Checked

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-54

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Enter CW mode and select volume menu (right side) – increase the volume

Figure 7-65 Increase the volume

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-55

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-9
Probes not Recognized Troubleshooting
7-9-1 Purpose of this Section
If the system does not recognize any of the connected probes. perform the following procedure.

7-9-2 Probes not Recognized Procedure

1.) Reseat the PSB, TCFE-2 boards according to Venue service manual
2.) If the issue is not resolved, this may be a probe issue. In this case, perform the following steps for
each of the probes individually:
1.) disconnect all probes except one probe and restart the system
2.) If the issue persists, continue checking this probe on all the other ports to decide if it is a
probe issue or a PSB issue
3.) If the system still does not recognize any of the probes, replace PSB module (P/N S5726584P)

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-56

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-10
System does not turn on Troubleshooting
7-10-1 Purpose of this Section
This section manages the most common scenarios where the system does not startup.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-57

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-10-2 Cockpit ON/OFF Button turns orange -->BEP BIOS Jumper Setup
Symptom: The system does not turn ON (cockpit on/off button turns green for a few seconds and then
turns orange).

Suggested solution: Reset BEP BIOS jumper

1.) Reset BIOS by changing the jumper position as shown in the picture: move from the 2 outer pins to
the 2 inner pins

Figure 7-66 Change Jumper Position to Reset BIOS

2.) Turn on the system and then off again

3.) Reset the jumper to its original position

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-58

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-10-3 BEP Fan does not Spin (ON/OFF button is Orange)-->MPB to BIB Connection
Symptom: T-CFE and T-FEPS LEDs turn On and then off; BEP fan does not spin,

The On/Off button on the cockpit turns green for a second and then turns orange)

Figure 7-67 T-CFE LEDs; T-FEPs LEDs

Suggested solution: Reset MPB to BIB connection

1.) Verify BEP jumper is in place

2.) Reseat MPB to BIB cable

Figure 7-68 MPB to BIB cable Reseat

3.) Check BIB connector for bent pins

4.) Replace BIB board

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-59

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-10-4 Application error: “Abnormal system behavior”-->Front End Connections

Symptom: Auxiliary Display works (LEDs on). The application starts with an Error: “Abnormal system
behavior occurred”

Suggested solution: Reset front end connections

1.) Inspect the BIB (blue) cable, if damaged - replace the BIB board.
2.) Reset the BIB (blue) cable on the T-CFE2 side (disconnect and re-connect).

Figure 7-69 Reset BIB cable

3.) Inspect and re-connect MPB to T-FEPS power cable. Replace if damaged.

Figure 7-70 Reset T-FEPS power cable

4.) Check power cable to Frontend; If damaged - replace power cable

5.) Reload software
6.) Replace T-CFE2 board.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-60

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-10-5 No Auxiliary Display

Symptom: No Auxiliary Display (LEDs are off) when turning on the system

Figure 7-71 No auxiliary display

Suggested solution: Reset front end connections

1.) If fans are spinning:

a.) Reset cockpit cables
b.) Reset MPB
c.) Replace cockpit
2.) If fans are NOT spinning
a.) Turn off the switch located at the rear part of the system for 30 seconds and turn on again
b.) Reset cockpit cables
c.) Reset MPB
d.) Replace MPB

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-61

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-11
MPB Diagnostics Failure Troubleshooting
7-11-1 Purpose of this Section
MPB diagnostics test fails if remaining scan time is less than 20 minutes. To identify if there is a real
failure of the MPB, perform the following procedure.

7-11-2 MPB Diagnostics Procedure Troubleshooting

1.) When running MPB Diagnostics, if the following screen appears, indicating the remaining scan time
is less than 20 minRun diagnostic test again with fully charged batteries.

NOTE:

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-62

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-12
RFID Badge Scanning Setup
7-12-1 Introduction
Personal IDs and associated passwords can be preset on the Venue, or the lock screen may be
configured to be the default start up screen.

If the User Auto Logon preset is blank, you are prompted to login by entering Operator and password.
You can also log in using a physical RFID element (i.e., Badge). When the RFID option is enabled, the
lock screen displays an indication to tap a badge to log in.

Figure 7-72 RFID Badge Scanning Setup

Fill-in the fields as follows:

1.) In the Operator field: Select the Operator.

2.) In the Password field: Enter Operator's password (optional).
3.) Select type of Logon, Emergency or Cancel.

Note: Emergency logon allows you to store an exam but not save it into the Archive.

4.) To log in with a badge (Tap in), touch the RFID scanner with the badge/chip.

Note: If there is an issue logging in with an RFID, enter your Operator and Password to login.

5.) If the system screen locked during an active exam due to inactivity, and the logged in user taps in
or enters Operator and password, the screen unlocks.

Note: While in the lock screen, the system also allows for changing the system operator. When a
different user logs in (with a badge or by entering Operator and password), the system
prompts whether to end the current exam or continue. Tap End the current exam.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-63

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7-12-2 Multifactor login and Grace period

Venue supports a safety mechanism called multifactor login for ensuring that the "Tapped in" user is the
actual user. If the server supports Multifactor login, the user must enter the operator/password and a
badge login.

A "Grace Period” (amount of time during which the multifactor authentication is valid) may be added to
the multifactor login.

During the grace period, next time the user does not have to use the multifactor login and may use the
tap in tap out method.

er Venue requires a multifactor login or a multifactor login with grace period is determined via the
authentication server and is not part of the system configuration.

NOTE: Emergency mode is available in all scenarios where the screen is locked.

7-12-3 Logoff
To logoff, tap Patient on the top left of the screen and then tap Logout at the bottom of the patient
screen. When the RFID option is enabled, tap out by touching the RFID scanner with your badge a
second time. Venue prompts you if you wish to log-out.

NOTE: A second tap from a different user (When a user is already logged in) is ignored.

7-12-4 Configuration
NOTE: In order to enable RFID badge login there is a need to establish connectivity between the LDAP
server and Ultrasound system.

Before starting the setup process, please prepare the certificate. The certificate is provided by the
Imprivata team / Hospital IT.

1.) Login to system as Admin.

2.) Navigate to Config' Admin' Session management
3.) Enable 'RFID badge supported' checkbox
4.) Set the Badge Authentication IP (enter IP AND NOT URL!).
5.) Set Badge Authentication Domain.
6.) Set Authentication Product Id.
7.) Set Service User Credentials (UserName and password).

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-64

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7-73 RFID Badge Config: Set Service User Credentials

8.) Navigate to LDAP tab.

Figure 7-74 RFID Badge Config: LDAP tab

9.) Enable 'LDAP Authentication' checkbox.

10.)Enter Directory Server IP address.
11.)Enter Port number
12.)Uncheck the SSL checkbox.
13.)Enter Domain and click Connect.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-65

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7-75 RFID Badge Config: Connect to Server

14.)On the pop dialog window fill in the user credentials (UserName and password) and press ok.
15.)A 'Test connection' window will open, verify the connection = Success and click on 'close' button.

Figure 7-76 RFID Badge Config: Text Connection Window

16.)Select a group for domain users in the following format: CN=Users, DC=ge, DC=local, DC=com

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-66

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7-77 RFID Badge Config: Select Domain

7-12-5 Group Mapping configuration

In order to map the LDAP group to local system group we need to select the relevant group from a list.

1) Double click on the relevant group

2) Choose which department shall have the Group access (For example: Operators)

7-12-6 Certificate installation

1.) Navigate to Config' Connectivity ' TcpIp.
2.) Under Wifi Configuration section click on 'Manage certificates'
3.) Insert your Disk On Key with the certificate, and press scan.

Figure 7-78 RFID Badge Certificate Installation: Scan certificate from DiskOnKey

4.) Select applicable certificate and press install.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-67

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Verify the certificate has Installed status = 'Yes' (as shown in picture below) and close the Window.

Figure 7-79 RFID Badge Certificate Installation: Verify Successful Installation

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-68

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-13
ViewPoint Reporting
NOTE: Supported from R4.1 SW Only.

7-13-1 Introduction
Personal IDs and associated passwords can be preset on the Venue, or the lock screen may be
configured to be the default start up screen.

ViewPoint Reporting is an exam report package option for your Venue system that allows you to fill out
an exam specific report form directly on the system during the exam.

Fill in the report form by using the touch screen on the convenient user interface and toggling between
the report and exam screen at any time during the exam.

NOTE: Availability of the ViewPoint Reporting option is region dependent. This option may not be
available in your region.

7-13-2 Overview
The ViewPoint Reporting package requires a continuous connection to a ViewPoint 6 workstation. For
every new exam, a new report form is sent from the ViewPoint workstation to Venue. The user may
select and fill up multiple form-types.

Upon ending the exam, the filled report forms will all be communicated back to the ViewPoint 6
workstation. A final report may be produced, stored, or sent further to the institute's EMR system from
the ViewPoint 6 workstation.

NOTE: In the ViewPoint 6 workstation you may edit or add to the exam report's data. may be edited
further.

7-13-3 Configuration
NOTE: In order to establish connectivity between ViewPoint server and Ultrasound system there is a
need to load two certificates on to the system.

The certificates need to be provided by the ViewPoint team.

1.) Navigate to Config' Connectivity' Reporting

2.) Enter IP or HostName.
3.) Enter Port number.
4.) Checkmark the box as shown below and select certificates.
5.) Tap Save.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-69

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7-80 1ViewPoint Reporting: Configuration

NOTE: Check the Jump to Report on EndExam box to configure ViewPoint to automatically jump back
to the report upon tapping End Exam.

7-13-4 Troubleshooting
For Venue to connect VP, Venue tries to resolve the host name, in a domain controlled environment
there is no issue and Venue does it successfully.

For security reasons most ports in Venue are blocked including ports that allows other protocols for
resolving the host name

In case there is an environment that Venue cannot connect because Host name cannot be resolved the
bellow will fix it:

1.) Step 1: Click the Windows button and type Notepad in the search bar.
2.) Step 2: Right click on Notepad and then Run as Administrator.
3.) Step 3: You'll be asked, "Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?". Choose
Yes.
4.) Step 4: In Notepad, choose File then Open.
5.) Step 5: Navigate to C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts or click the address bar at the top and
paste in the path and choose Enter. If you don't readily see the host file in the /etc directory then
select All files from the File name: drop-down list, then click on the hosts file.
6.) Step 6: Add the appropriate IP and hostname at the end of your hosts' file, select Save, and then
close the file.
7.) Step 7: Finally, you will want to flush your DNS cache for your computer to recognize changes to
the file. Click the Windows button and search command prompt.
8.) Step 8: Type the following command in the terminal and press Enter
ipconfig /flushdns

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-70

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-14
Venue HDMI connection troubleshooting
NOTE: This troubleshooting workflow is not applicable for LDM (Large Display Monitor), which is not
supported for Venue family products.

7-14-1 Troubleshooting
The following procedure describes Venue HDMI connection troubleshooting.

1.) Turn off Venue system.

2.) Connect the HDMI cable to the projector or television monitor.
3.) Turn on the projector or television monitor.
4.) Select the correct input on the projector or television monitor (ie HDMI 1).
5.) Connect the HDMI cable to the back of the Venue.
6.) Turn on the Venue
7.) If no image is seen select the LCD button from the 'settings menu' and press 'video out'.

Figure 7-81 Select LCD button

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-71

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-15
Wireless Probe Indications and Management
7-15-1 Introduction
Vscan Air CL and SL wireless probes include indications for battery charge status, WIFI connection,
and thermal indication, displayed on the system screen. For guidelines and suggested work practice,
refer to the vendor’s documentation.

NOTE: For detailed information and for any support and liability issues related to Vscan Air CL and SL
wireless probes and related accessories, including charger, refer to the manufacturer manual
and customer support (3rd party policy).

NOTE: Wireless probe is supported for APU Back End only (will not work on CPU Back End).

The following figures provide illustrations for major on-screen indications regarding probe battery
charge status and WIFI connection:

• Probe battery and WIFI connection indications, when the wireless probe is connected but not
selected .

• Probe charging indication: when the probe is placed on the charger, it may not be selected, as

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-72

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

indicated by the following dialog.

• When disconnecting probe, the following indication appears

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-73

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• When the wireless probe is in shutting down process, the screen indicates it as follows .

• When the probe is shutdown, the indication is as follows.

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-74

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• When the WIFI connection fails, the screen indication is as follows.

The wireless probe includes LED indications showing connecting, charging, and more. The following
figure s are for illustration only, showing the major indications. For more details, refer to the wireless
probe manual, see https://fccid.io/YOM-VSCANAIR/User-Manual/Product-Manual-5040759.

• Probe is being charged: Yellow light on both LEDs indicates probe is charging. Green light on both
LEDs indicates the Vscan Air CL is fully charged:

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-75

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• The following figure illustrates VSCAN air LED states

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-76

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8
This chapter provides replacement procedures for Venue™system parts, as outlined below.

NOTE: The illustrations provided in this chapter are for illustration purposes only and are subject to change
without notice.

CAUTION Before performing any service activities related to electronic boards and/or accessible metal
parts, make sure to disconnect any power source from the system:
- Switch off the circuit breaker located at the back side of the system.
- Disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet and from the system.
- Remove Internal battery packs.

Section 8-2
Accessories - Replacement Procedures
8-2-1 Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Replacement Procedure

8-2-1-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-26.

8-2-1-2 Time Required

5 min

8-2-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-2-1-4 Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Removal Procedure

1) Pull the basket upwards and remove it as shown below:.

Figure 8-82 Removing the Basic/Large Storage Basket

8-2-1-5 Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new Basic Storage Basket/Large Storage Basket.

8-2-2 Power Cable Holder Replacement Procedure

8-2-2-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-26.

8-2-2-2 Time Required

5 min

8-2-2-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-2-2-4 Power Cable Holder Removal Procedure

1) Move the Power Cable Holder to the center of the Halo Handle and remove the Power Cable Holder

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

by pushing it upwards.

Figure 8-83 Removing the Power Cable Holder

8-2-2-5 Power Cable Holder Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new Power Cable Holder.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-3
Covers - Replacement Procedures
8-3-1 Overview of Covers

18

14
16
15 8

3
9 6

4 2
5
7 1

12 4 11
13
17
10

Front View Rear View

Figure 8-1 Venue™ Ultrasound Unit

Table 8-12 Venue™ Ultrasound Unit Covers

Label Item Label Item

1 Cover: MPB Door FRU 10 Cover: Front Base FRU

2 Cover: Mid Thermal Baffle - CRU 11 Cover: Left Side Base- FRU

3 Cover: Scanner Door- FRU 12 Cover: Right Side Base - FRU

4 Cover: Right Side eTower - CRU 13 Cover: Right Base Bottom - FRU

5 Cover: Left Side eTower - CRU 14 Mechanical - RISER with Friction Adj. hole FRU

6 Cover: Upper eTower Front - FRU 15 Cover: RS Probe Connector - CRU

7 Cover: Lower Front eTower - CRU 16 Cover: Riser Thermal - FRU

8 Halo Handle with Locking - FRU 17 Cover: Left Base Bottom - FRU

9 Cover: Printer Insert - FRU 18 Cover: Cockpit Rear Cables - CRU

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-1-1 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

DANGER ELECTRICAL HAZARDS EXIST AT SEVERAL POINTS IN THE SYSTEM.

FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH ALL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND
HIGH CURRENT LEVELS BEFORE REMOVING ANY OF THE COVERS.

DANGER DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST BAND STRAP WHEN REMOVING
PARTS FROM THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT. BEFORE REMOVING ANY
PART OF THE POWER UNIT, TURN THE POWER OFF AND
DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD.

CAUTION BEFORE REMOVING CIRCUIT BOARDS, TURN THE POWER OFF AND WEAR THE ESD WRIST
BAND STRAP.

CAUTION Before performing any service activities related to electronic boards and/or accessible metal
parts, make sure to disconnect any power source from the system:
- Switch off the circuit breaker located at the back side of the system.
- Disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet and from the system.
- Remove Internal battery packs.

8-3-1-2 Preparation for Cover Installation

Replacement covers for the Venue™ are supplied with the required securing screws and ball stud/ball
stud receptacles. Before installing a replacement cover, it is necessary to fit these in the appropriate
positions. Refer to the illustrations provided in the specific Cover Replacement procedure.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-2 Lower Front eTower Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-2-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-2-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-2-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

8-3-2-4 Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

1) Gripping the recess at the center of the cover, pull the lower front eTower cover out towards you to
remove it from the system.

Figure 8-2 Removing the Lower Front eTower

8-3-2-5 Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Holding the recess with one hand, push the top of the cover upwards and inwards with the other
hand, until clicks into place.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-3 Left Side eTower Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-3-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-3-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-3-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

8-3-3-4 Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the RS Probe Cover.:

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

3) Grip the rubber holder and pull the cover toward you to remove it from the system.

1 2 3

Grip here...

Figure 8-3 Removing the Left Side eTower Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-3-5 Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

1) Return the left side eTower cover and make sure the eTower pins go inside the dedicated holes on
the inner side of the cover

eTower pin

Figure 8-4 Installing the Left Side eTower Cover

2) Install the RS Probe Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

3.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Lower Front eTower Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-4 Right Side eTower Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-4-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-4-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-4-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

8-3-4-4 Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) The right side eTower cover removal procedure is identical to the left side eTower cover removal
procedure.:.

• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

8-3-4-5 Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

1) The right side eTower cover installation procedure is identical to the left side eTower cover
installation procedure.:

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

2) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Right Side eTower Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-5 Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-5-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-5-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-5-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

8-3-5-4 Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Removal Procedure

1) Grip the cover at its bottom and pull the cover toward you to remove it from the system.

Figure 8-5 Removing the Mid Baffle Thermal Cover

8-3-5-5 Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Reinstall the cover.

Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-6 Upper eTower Front Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-6-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-6-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-6-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-3-6-4 Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower
Cover and Left Side eTower Cover:.
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove the Upper eTower Cover.

4.) Release the two Phillips screws and remove the Printer Insert Cover or Printer Frame Cover
(depending on system configuration) to separate it from the Upper eTower Front Cover.

Upper eTower Cover

..

.. ..
Printer Frame Cover
Printer Insert Cover

Figure 8-6 Removing Upper eTower Front Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-11
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-6-5 Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Install the Printer Insert Cover or Printer Frame Cover (depending on system configuration) on the
Upper eTower Cover and secure with two Phillips screws.
2.) Install the Upper eTower Cover on the scanner.
3.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower Cover and the Left Side
eTower Cover and RS Probe Cover.
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
4.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Upper eTower Front Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-7 Printer Insert Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-7-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-7-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-7-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-3-7-4 Printer Insert Cover Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the Upper eTower Front Cover.:.

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Release the two Phillips screws and remove the Printer Insert Cover.

Printer Insert Cover

Figure 8-7 Removing Printer Insert Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-7-5 Printer Insert Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Install the Printer Insert Cover on the Upper eTower Cover and secure with two Phillips screws.
2.) Install the Upper eTower Cover on the scanner.

• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure

3.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Printer Insert Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-8 MPB Door Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-8-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-8-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-8-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

8-3-8-4 MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, RS probe cover, Right Side eTower
Cover and the Left Side eTower Cover:.
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Loosen the four captive screws (two on each side), grip the MPB Door Cover at the bottom and pull
toward you to remove it.

Figure 8-8 Removing MPB Door Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-8-5 MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Install the MPB Cover on the scanner.
2.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower Cover and the Left Side
eTower Cover.
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
3.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

MPB Door Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-9 RS Probe Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-9-1 Tools
None

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-17.

8-3-9-2 Time Required

1 min

8-3-9-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-3-9-4 RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

1.) Grip the RS Probe Cover on the recess on its bottom and gently pull it toward you to disconnect it
from the holding magnets.
2.) Slide the cover down to remove it.

Figure 8-9 Removing RS Probe Cover

8-3-9-5 RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Slide the RS Probe Cover upward and align it in order to insert the pins into the riser assembly.
2.) Gently push the cover in order to fix the cover in its place with holding magnets.

RS Probe Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-10 Riser Thermal Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-10-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-18.

8-3-10-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-10-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-3-10-4 Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Right Side and Left Side eTower covers:
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
2.) Open the door.
3.) Hold the cover and pull it down.
4.) Remove the cover.

Figure 8-10 Removing Riser Thermal Cover

8-3-10-5 Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure

Attach the Riser Thermal Cover to scanner and secure with two Phillips screws.

Riser Thermal Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-11 Riser Cover Replacement Procedure

8-3-11-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-18.

8-3-11-2 Time Required

5 min

8-3-11-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown

Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-3-11-4 Riser Cover Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, RS Probe Cover. Right Side and Left Side
eTower covers, Upper Front eTower, and Riser Thermal Cover.
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

4.) Remove Scanner Arm.

• Arm Removal Procedure

5.) Loosen and remove four screws securing the riser cover to the riser (access screws from
underneath).

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Remove the riser cover.

Figure 8-11 Removing Riser Cover

Note: Ensure the pressure pin is not dropped (if exists)

Figure 8-12 Pressure Pin

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-3-11-5 Riser Cover Installation Procedure

1.) Install the rubber cap on the riser cover.

Figure 8-13 Installing Riser Cover Rubber Cap

2.) Install four rubber cable guides (two short guides on the back side and two long guides in the front
side) on the riser cover. Use a flat screwdriver to gently affix the rubber guide in place, if required
Short rubber guide

Figure 8-14 Installing Rubber Cable Guides

3.) Install new riser cover on riser and secure the four securing screws

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Install Scanner Arm.

• Arm Installation Procedure

5.) Install cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

6.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Right Side and Left Side eTower covers, Front Base
Cover and Riser Thermal Cover
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Riser Cover Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-4
System Modules- Replacement Procedures
8-4-1 Base Module Replacement Procedure

8-4-1-1 Tools
LOCTITE® 243™

Allen key 4mm.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-15.

8-4-1-2 Time Required

10 min

8-4-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-1-4 Base Module Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, RS Probe cover, Right Side and Left Side
eTower covers, and Front Base Cover
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Front Base Cover Removal Procedure
4.) Position the system on its side to gain access to the system base.
5.) Unscrew the four base mounting screws.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Remove the base module.

Four screws that hold Base Module Base Module Removed

Figure 8-15 Removing the Base Module

7.) Remove the four caster wheels.

• Casters Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-1-5 Base Module Installation Procedure

1.) Install the caster wheels.
2.) Install the Base Module. Mount the eTower on the base according to the position of the emboss
metal sheets that assist to properly position the eTower on the base

Location nipples on the Base Module

Figure 8-16 Installing the Base Module

3.) Apply LOCTITE® 243™ on the Base Module mounting screws and tighten them.
4.) Refit the following covers: Right Side and Left Side eTower covers., Lower Front eTowe and Front
Base Cover
• Front Base Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure

5.) Install the cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Base Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-2 Front End Assembly Replacement

8-4-2-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-35.

8-4-2-2 Time Required

5 min

8-4-2-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-2-4 Front End Assembly Removal

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure

3.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly and loosen the captive
screw. Then, carefully open the door.

Figure 8-17 Opening FE Door

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-26

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Disconnect the following cables:

• MPB to T-FEPS
• BIB to T-CFE2 (Blue cable)
• Fan cable
5.) While supporting the FE module with one hand, unscrew the four Phillips screws and remove the
full FE module.

Figure 8-18 Removing the Full FE Module from the FE Door

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-2-5 Front End Assembly Installation

1.) Install the new FE assembly.
2.) Secure the Full FE Module to the FE Door with four captive screws.

NOTE: It is recommended to secure the upper left captive screw first.

3.) Mount the FE Door assembly on the scanner.

4.) Reconnect the following cables:
• PCIe cable
• MPB TO T-FEPS Cable and secure it to the CFE module and to the T-FEPS module with cable
clips.
• Fan cable
5.) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly (Figure 8-17).
6.) Tighten the captive screw.
7.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, right side eTower and RS Probe
Cover.

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
8.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

9.) Turn ON power to the system

10.)Perform Software Update Procedure to make sure the FW is updated

SSD Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-28

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-3 Front End Metal Door Replacement

8-4-3-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-16.

8-4-3-2 Time Required

5 min

8-4-3-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-3-4 Front End Metal Door Removal

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, and Mid Thermal Baffle Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove full front end.

• Front End Assembly Removal

4.) Remove the riser thermal cover.

• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

5.) Leave the door open by approximately 30 degrees, to make enough space for the FE door to be
removed.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Slightly lift and slide the door upwards until completely removed.

Figure 8-19 Removing the FE Door

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-30

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Remove the eight holding screws to separate the front end metal door from the scanner door cover

Figure 8-20 Separating the scanner door cover from FE Door

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-3-5 Front End Metal Door Installation

1.) Install the new FE Door assembly.
2.) Install the riser thermal cover.

• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure

3.) Secure the FE Module to the FE Door with four screws (previously removed).
4.) Mount the FE Door assembly on the scanner.
5.) Reconnect the following cables:
• PCIe cable
• MPB TO T-FEPS Cable and secure it to the T-CFE2 module and to the T-FEPS module with
cable clips.
• Fan cable
6.) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly.
7.) Tighten the captive screw.
8.) Refit the following covers: Mid Thermal Baffle Cover, Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, right
side eTower and RS Probe Cover.

• Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Installation Procedure

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
9.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

10.)Turn ON power to the system.

Front End Metal Door Replacement

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-32

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-4 SSD Module Replacement Procedure

CAUTION: The SSD contains patient information data. when replacing the SSD, Leave the faulty part
at the customer site.

8-4-4-1 Tools
Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-22.

8-4-4-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-4-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-4-4 SSD Module Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door assembly and loosen the
captive screw.Then, open the Front End door.
4.) Fix the FE door with door support.
5.) Release the SSD Module captive screw and extract the SSD Module.

Captive Screw

Figure 8-21 Removing the SSD Module

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-4-5 SSD Module Installation Procedure

1) Insert the SSD module into its slot and tighten the captive screw.
2) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly.
3.) Tighten the captive screw.
4.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, right side eTower and RS Probe
Cover.
Ins

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
5.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

6.) Turn ON power to the system.

SSD Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-34

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-5 Cockpit (Monitor) Replacement Procedure

8-4-5-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

Flat-head screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-20.

8-4-5-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-5-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-5-4 Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

1.) On the back of the cockpit, release four screws and remove the transparent Wi-Fi dongle cover.
• Disconnect the Wi-Fi dongle.

Figure 8-22 Wi-Fi Cover and Dongle Removal

2.) Remove four Phillips screws securing the cockpit (monitor) to the arm.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-35

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Remove the cockpit rear cables cover, if exists (see below).

System without Cable Cover System with Cable Cover

Figure 8-23 Cockpit (Monitor) Securing Screws and Cockpit Rear Cover Removal

4.) Disconnect the following cables connected to cockpit (monitor):

• BE TO COCKPIT CABLE
• MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE (use flat-head screwdriver)

Figure 8-24 Cockpit (Monitor) Cables

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-36

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Ground cables (x2))

Figure 8-25 Cockpit Ground Cables Removal

5.) Remove the Gel Holder.

CAUTION Raise the Articulated Arm to its up position to prevent the unintentional injury to personnel from
the stored mechanical energy.

6.) Hold the cockpit (monitor) on its top, insert a screwdriver into the dedicated hole and press to
release the securing spring. The click is sounded, indicating the securing spring is released.

Spring locked

Insert screwdriver here

Spring released

Figure 8-26 Cockpit (Monitor) Securing Screws

7.) Lift and remove the cockpit (monitor).

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-37

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-5-5 Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

1.) Mount the cockpit (monitor) on the mounting hooks and secure with four Phillips screws.

Figure 8-27 Installing Cockpit (Monitor)

2.) Reconnect the cockpit (monitor) cables:

• BE TO COCKPIT CABLE
• MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE
• Ground cables (x2)
• Rear cable cover (if exists)
3.) Reinstall the Gel Holder.

Cockpit (Monitor) Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-38

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6 PSU Module Replacement Procedure

8-4-6-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-19.

8-4-6-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-6-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-6-4 PSU Module Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower
Cover and the Left Side eTower Cover:.
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the MPB door.

• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the two battery packs

• Battery Module Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-39

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Release the captive screw at the bottom of the PSU and pull the PSU out gently.

Figure 8-28 Removing the PSU Module

8-4-6-5 PSU Module Installation Procedure

1.) Slide the new PSU into position.
2.) Secure the captive screw at the bottom of the PSU.

Figure 8-29 Installing the PSU Module

3.) Install the two battery packs

• Battery Module Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-40

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Install the MPB Door

• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure

5.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower Cover, Left Side eTower
Cover, and RS Probe Cover.
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

PSU Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-41

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-7 Battery Module Replacement Procedure

8-4-7-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-19.

8-4-7-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-7-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-7-4 Battery Module Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower
Cover, Left Side eTower Cover and MPB Door Cover:.
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Release the two captive screws securing each battery pack.
4.) Pull out the top and bottom battery packs.

Battery Pack

Figure 8-30 Removing the Battery Pack

8-4-7-5 Battery Module Installation Procedure

1.) Return the batteries into the scanner in the direction shown by the arrow on the label. See the figure
above.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-42

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2.) Tighten the two mounting screws for each battery.

3) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower Cover, Left Side eTower
Cover, MPB Door Cover and RS Probe Cover.
• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

4.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Battery Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-43

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-8 Back End (BE) Module Replacement Procedure

8-4-8-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-22.

8-4-8-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-8-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-8-4 BE Module Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Left Side eTower cover, and Right Side
eTower cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove the SSD module.

• SSD Module Removal Procedure

4) Remove MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-44

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly and loosen the captive
screw. Then, carefully open the door.

Figure 8-31 Opening Scanner Door

6) Secure the door with door support.

7.) Disconnect the following cables connected to the BE module:
• MPB to BIB
• MPB to BEP (white USB cable)
• Cockpit to BEP split cable (green and black)
• Printer cable (yellow)
• ECG USB cable.

Figure 8-32 Disconnecting Cables Connected to BE Module

8.) Disconnect the MPB to BE power cable.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-45

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) Disconnect the BIB blue cable from the CFE plastic cable guide.Disconnect the MPB to BIB cable.

Figure 8-33 Disconnecting MPB to BE Power Cable

10.)Loosen the two captive screws on both sides of the BE module.

Figure 8-34 Removing Back End Module

11.)Gently slide out the BE module.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-46

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-8-5 BE Module Installation Procedure

1) Hold the SSD cables and slide in the BE module half way into the eTower.
2) Connect the MPB to BIB cable.
3.) Fully insert the BE module into the eTower and secure the two captive screws.
4.) Reconnect the following cables:
• MPB to BIB
• MPB to BEP (white)
• Cockpit to BEP split cable (green and black)
• Printer cable (yellow)
Use the following diagram for reference:

Figure 8-35 BE Cable Connection Diagram

5.) Reconnect the BIB blue cable to the CFE plastic cable guide.
6.) Reconnect the MPB to BE power cable.
7) Install the SSD module.

• SSD Module Installation Procedure

8) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly.
9.) Tighten the captive screw.
10) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

11.)Refit the following covers: left side eTower, right side eTower, and RS Probe Cover.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-47

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure

• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
12.)Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

13.)Turn ON power to the system.

Back End (BE) Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-48

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-9 BIOS battery Replacement Procedure

8-4-9-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-22.

8-4-9-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-9-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-9-4 BIOS battery replacement Procedure

1) Remove BE Module

• BE Module Removal Procedure

2) Remove BIOS battery gently from the connector while holding the connector.

Figure 8-36 Removing BIOS battery

4.) Install new BIOS battery CR 2032 (To be obtained locally).

NOTE: Make sure the battery is inserted the correct way(+/-)

5) Install BE Module

• BE Module Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-49

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-10 BEP PCB Replacement Procedure

8-4-10-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

8-4-10-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-10-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-10-4 BEP PCB Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

3.) Perform BE module removal procedure.

• BE Module Removal Procedure

4.) Remove omega bracket: release 5 screws connecting the omega bracket:

Figure 8-37 BE Omega Bracket Removal

5.) Remove the supporting bracket using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver:

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-50

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Release two captive screws

• Release two screws at the bottom of the bracket

Figure 8-38 Removing BE Supporting Bracket

6.) Release the following cable connectors:

• SATA DATA BE TO SSD A (red cable): press the latch and pull the cable connector out
• SSD PWR cable: Gently pull the connector towards you

Figure 8-39 Disconnect SATA DATA and SSD PWR Cables

7.) Disconnect the following cables at the back of the BE:

• Two USB connectors
• Network cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-51

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Display port

Figure 8-40 Disconnect BE Cables from BE Back

8.) Remove the BEP PCB:

• Release four screws in the BEP PCB corners using Phillips screwdriver

Figure 8-41 Remove BEP PCB

Note: If the MiTx to BIB cable is preventing easy removal of the BEP PCB, disconnect the MiTx to BIB
cable connector latch (see yellow circle in the above figure).

• Gently take out the BEP PCB

9.) The BEP PCB is released.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-52

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-10-5 BEP PCB Installation Procedure

1.) Reconnect the BEP PCB using four screws in the PCB corners using Phillips screwdriver

Figure 8-42 Reconnect BEP PCB

2.) Reconnect the following cables at the back of the BE:

• Two USB connectors
• Network cable
• Display port

Figure 8-43 Reconnect BE Cables from BE Back

3.) Reconnect the following cable connectors:

• SATA DATA BE TO SSD A (red cable)

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-53

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• SSD PWR cable

Figure 8-44 Reconnect SATA DATA and SSD PWR Cables

4.) Reconnect the supporting bracket using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver:

• Two captive screws
• Two screws at the bottom of the bracket

Figure 8-45 Reconnecting BE Supporting Bracket

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-54

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Reconnect omega bracket: attach 5 screws connecting the omega bracket

Figure 8-46 BE Omega Bracket Repositioning

6.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

7.) Install MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

8.) Refit the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
9.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

10.)Turn ON power to the system.

Back End (BE) Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-55

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-11 MPB Module Replacement Procedure

8-4-11-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-19.

8-4-11-2 Time Required

15 min

8-4-11-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-11-4 MPB Module Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower
cover, Left Side eTower cover and MPB Door Cover.
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the Battery Packs.

• Battery Module Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the PSU module.

• PSU Module Removal Procedure

5.) Release the captive screw at the top center of the MPB.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-56

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Release the captive screw at the bottom center of the MPB.

Figure 8-47 MPB Module - Mounting Screws

7.) Pull the MPB halfway out.

8.) Tilt the top toward you and pull the MPB out all the way.

Figure 8-48 MPB Module - Removal

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-57

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-11-5 MPB Module Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the MPB module as follows:
a.) Insert the MPB module so that it goes under the Top Receptical Box. To do that, the MPB
Module must be inserted in angled position and not at 90°.
b.) Make sure all cable connectors are floating.
c.) Position the MPB Module at 90° and slide into the rails until the docking of the MPB module.
2.) Tighten the two mounting screws to secure the MPB module.
3.) Return the PSU module.

• PSU Module Installation Procedure

4.) Return the battery packs.

• Battery Module Installation Procedure

5.) Refit the following covers: MPB Door Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side and Left Side
eTower covers, and RS Probe cover
• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-58

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Check PM_FW,.

Figure 8-49 Check if PM_FW is up to date

9.) If PM_FW is not up to date (the Comment section states “expected version is 3.xx"):perform
software reload

MPB Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-59

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-12 T-CFE2 Module Replacement Procedure

CAUTION When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of
electrostatic-sensitive components. Always have the ESD wrist strap
connected either to the DIB chassis or to the GND plug at the rear of the
scanner, and to your hand.

8-4-12-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-21.

8-4-12-2 Time Required

15 minutes

8-4-12-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-12-4 T-CFE2 Module Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Open and remove the full Front End door assembly and place it on a stable surface:

• Front End Assembly Removal

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-60

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Loosen the 4 retaining screws and remove the T-CFE2 Fan box.

Figure 8-50 Removing T-CFE2 Fan Box

5.) Loosen the 2 retaining screws and remove the T-FEPS module..

• Front End Power Supply Removal Procedure

Figure 8-51 Removing TFEPS

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-61

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Loosen and remove the six screws.

Figure 8-52 Removing T-CFE2 screws

7.) Separate the T-CFE board From the T-PSB board, by pulling the CFE Release Arm handle
upwards.

Figure 8-53 Separating the T-CFE2 Board

8-4-12-5 T-CFE2 Module Installation Procedure

1.) Fit the new T-CFE2 module on the T-PSB board and fasten with six screws.
2.) Attach the T-CFE2 Fan box and secure with 4 screws.
3.) Install the T-FEPS module and Install the full Front End assembly.

• Front End Assembly Installation

4.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower, and RS Probe

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-62

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Cover.
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
5.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

6.) Turn ON power to the system.

T-CFE2 Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-63

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-13 T-PSB Module Replacement Procedure

CAUTION When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of
electrostatic-sensitive components. Always have the ESD wrist strap
connected either to the DIB chassis or to the GND plug at the rear of the
scanner, and to your hand.

8-4-13-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-19.

8-4-13-2 Time Required

15 minutes

8-4-13-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-4-13-4 T-PSB Module Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Remove the T-FEPS module.

• Front End Power Supply Removal Procedure

4.) Open and remove the full Front End assembly and place it on your laps in order not to damage the
probe locker levers.:

• Front End Assembly Removal

5.) Remove the T-CFE2 module.

• T-CFE2 Module Removal Procedure

The T-PSB module is now separated from other parts.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-64

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Remove the PCIe plastic cable guide and attach it to the new T-PSB module.

• Plastic Cable Guide for CFE Removal Procedure

8-4-13-5 T-PSB Module Installation Procedure

1.) Fit the T-PSB module and fasten with four screws.
2.) Install the T-CFE or T-CFE2 module.

• T-CFE2 Module Installation Procedure

3.) Install the T-FEPS module.

• Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Installation Procedure

4.) Install the full Front End assembly:

• Front End Assembly Installation

5.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower, and RS Probe
Cover::
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

T-PSB Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-65

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-5
Electronic Boards- Replacement Procedures
8-5-1 BIB Board Replacement Procedure

8-5-1-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips Screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-22.

8-5-1-2 Time Required

15 min

8-5-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-5-1-4 BIB Board Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Remove the Back End Module.

• BE Module Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the supporting bracket using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver:

• Release two captive screws

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-66

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Release two screws at the bottom of the bracket

Figure 8-54 Removing BE Supporting Bracket

5.) Disconnect BIB TO BE SPLIT CABLE connector that connects the BIB board to the BE module.

Figure 8-55 Removing BIB Board - Disconnecting BIB TO BE SPLIT CABLE Connector

6.) Disconnect the PCIe cable connector that connects the BIB board to the BE module.

Figure 8-56 Removing BIB Board - Disconnecting PCIe Cable Connector

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-67
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Remove the BIB Board.

Figure 8-57 Removing BIB Board

8-5-1-5 BIB Board Installation Procedure

1.) Install the BIB Board on the BE module.
2.) Connect the cable connector (previously disconnected).
3.) Tighten two screws to secure the BIB board to the BE module.
4.) Install the BE module.

• BE Module Installation Procedure

5.) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly.
6.) Tighten the captive screw.
7.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower, and RS Probe
cover:
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
8.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

9.) Turn ON power to the system.

BIB Board Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-68

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-2 T-CFE Release Arm Replacement Procedure

8-5-2-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

8-5-2-2 Time Required

15 minutes

8-5-2-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-5-2-4 CFE Board Release Arm Removal Procedure

The lever-shaped CFE Release Arm is located on the PSB Board.

CFE Release Arm

Figure 8-58 Location of CFE Release Arm

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove the T-CFE Module:

• T-CFE2 Module Removal Procedure

4.) Unscrew the two lever holding screws and remove the CFE Release Arm (Lever) from the PSB
Board.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-69

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 8-59 Removing CFE Release Arm

8-5-2-5 T-CFE Release Arm Installation Procedure

1) Install a new T-CFE2 Release Lever in position on the PSB board.
2) Refit the T-CFE2 Board.
3.) Insert and tighten the 6 T-CFE2 Board retaining screw shown in Figure 8-59, above.
4.) Install the T-FEPS module:

• Front End Power Supply Removal Procedure

5) Install the Front End door assembly:

• Front End Metal Door Replacement

6.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower.::
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system.

T-CFE Release Arm Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-70

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-3 Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Replacement Procedure

NOTE: The Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) is also referred to as the HVPS (High Voltage Power Supply).
CAUTION When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of
electrostatic-sensitive components. Always have the ESD wrist strap
connected either to the DIB chassis or to the GND plug at the rear of the
scanner, and to your hand.

8-5-3-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-21.

8-5-3-2 Time Required

15 minutes

8-5-3-3 Preparation
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-5-3-4 Front End Power Supply Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly and carefully open the door.

4) Disconnect the MPB TO T-FEPS Cable.

5.) Loosen the 2 retaining screws that secure the T- FEPS to the Scanner door assembly.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-71

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Using both hands, carefully pull the T-FEPS towards you and remove it from the T-CFE2.

Figure 8-60 Removing the T-FEPS Metal Cover

8-5-3-5 Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Installation Procedure

1.) Return a new T-FEPS to its position on the Front End door assembly.
2.) Follow the T-FEPS removal procedure step 4, in reverse order.
3.) Reconnect the cables (previously disconnected).
4.) Close the Front End door and fasten securely with the two latches:
5.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower::
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

6) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-72

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-4 T-CFE2 Fan box Replacement Procedure

CAUTION When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of
electrostatic-sensitive components. Always have the ESD wrist strap
connected either to the DIB chassis or to the GND plug at the rear of the
scanner, and to your hand.

8-5-4-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-21.

8-5-4-2 Time Required

15 minutes

8-5-4-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-5-4-4 T-CFE2 Fan box Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right
Side eTower.

• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly and loosen the captive
screw. Then, carefully open the door.
4.) Disconnect the MPB TO T-FEPS Cable.
5.) Disconnect the fan cable.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-73

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Loosen the 4 screws and carefully remove the T-CFE2 Fan box.

Figure 8-61 Removing the T-CFE2 Fan Box

8-5-4-5 T-CFE2 Fan box Installation Procedure

1.) Install the T-CFE2 Fan box and tighten the 4 retaining screws.
2.) Reconnect the cables (previously disconnected).
3.) Close the Front End door and fasten securely with the two latches:
4.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower and RS Probe
Cover::
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

5) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

6.) Turn ON power to the system.

T-CFE2 Fan box Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-74

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-6
Mechanical Parts- Replacement Procedures
8-6-1 MPB Front Metal Door Replacement Procedure

8-6-1-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-18.

8-6-1-2 Time Required

5 min

8-6-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-1-4 MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the Lower Front eTower cover.

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Release four captive screws and remove the MPB Front Metal Door.

Figure 8-62 Removing MPB Front Metal Door

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-75

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-1-5 MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new MPB Front Metal Cover and tighten the four captive screws.
2.) Refit the Lower Front eTower cover

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

4.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB Front Metal Door Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-76

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2 MPB Guide L and Guide R Replacement Procedure

NOTE: The procedure below is the same whether replacing MPB Guide L or MPB Guide R that are mirrored items
attached to the Receptacle Box side walls.

8-6-2-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-14.

8-6-2-2 Time Required

15 min

8-6-2-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-2-4 MPB Guide L/R Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower, Side Covers, MPB Power Door
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the MPB Module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

4.) Unscrew the two mounting screws that hold the Guide L/R.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-77

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Remove the Guide.

MPB Guide L/R

Mounting Screws

Figure 8-63 MPB Guide L/R- Mounting Screws

8-6-2-5 MPB Guide L/R Installation Procedure

1.) Attach the MP Guide L/R.
2.) Tighten the two mounting screws to secure the guide to the receptical box.

MPB Guide L/R

Figure 8-64 MPB Guide L/R- Mounting Screws

3.) Install the MPB Module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-78

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Refit the following covers: MPB Door Cover, Left and Right Side eTower Covers, Lower Front
eTower Cover, and RS Probe cover
• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
5.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

6.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB Guide L and Guide R Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-79

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3 Halo Handle Replacement Procedure

8-6-3-1 Tools
LOCTITE® 243™

Allen key 3 mm.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-15.

8-6-3-2 Time Required

30 min

8-6-3-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-3-4 Halo Handle Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the arm.

• Arm Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the Riser Thermal Cover.

• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

5.) Remove the Riser Cover.

• Riser Cover Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-80

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Remove the Halo Handle mounting screws: four (x4) front screws and four (x4) side screws (two
from each side).

Halo Handle Side Screws Halo Handle Front Screws

Figure 8-65 Removing the Halo Handle - Mounting Screws

7.) Lift the handle upwards and remove it.

Lift and Remove the Halo Handle Halo Handle Removed

Figure 8-66 Removing the Halo Handle

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-81

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-5 Halo Handle Installation Procedure

1.) Mount the Halo Handle on the eTower.
2.) Apply LOCTITE® 243™ on the Halo Handle mounting screws and tighten them.
3.) Install the Riser Cover.

• Riser Cover Installation Procedure

4.) Install the Riser Thermal Cover.

• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure

5.) Install the articulated arm.

• Arm Installation Procedure

6.) Install the cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system.

Halo Handle Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-82

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-4 Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure

8-6-4-1 Tools
Allen key 2.5 mm.

Snap ring (circlip) pliers

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-15.

8-6-4-2 Time Required

10 min

8-6-4-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-4-4 Arm Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Left Side eTower cover,
Right Side eTower cover and Riser Thermal Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Remove cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

4.) Carefully raise the arm to its up position.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-83

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Remove the arm base cover.

Figure 8-67 Removing Arm Base Cover

6.) If the cables are routed through the arm axis, refer to MPB TO Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure
and to BE to Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure
7.) Using Allen key screwdriver, remove the two securing screws of the arm side cover.
8.) Slide the arm side cover upwards and remove it.
9.) Perform steps 4-5 for the other arm side cover.

Figure 8-68 Removing Arm Side Covers

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-84

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10.)Pull out the cockpit (monitor) cables routed inside the riser.

Figure 8-69 Removing Cockpit (Monitor) Cables

11.)Disconnect the ground cable from the riser

Figure 8-70 Removing Ground Cable

12.)Using Forged Steel Ring Pliers, remove the C-clip and then the Teflon ring.

Teflon ring

C-clip

Teflon ring C-clip

Figure 8-71 Removing Teflon Ring and C-clip

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-85

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Remove the articulated arm.

Figure 8-72 Removing Scanner Arm

Note: Ensure the pressure pin is not dropped (if exists)

Figure 8-73 Pressure Pin

8-6-4-5 Arm Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new arm on the riser.
2.) Install the Teflon ring and then the C-clip.
3.) Route the cockpit (monitor) cables through the riser opening, refer to MPB TO Cockpit Cable
Installation Procedureand BE to Cockpit Cable Installation Procedure
4.) Route each cockpit (monitor) cable through the arm side and install the arm side covers.
5.) Re-connect the ground cable to the riser
6.) Secure each side cover with two securing screws.
7.) Install the arm base cover.
8.) Install the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Left Side eTower cover, Right Side eTower
cover, Riser Thermal Cover and RS Probe Cover.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-86

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
9.) Install the cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

10.)Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

11.)Turn ON power to the system.

Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-87

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-5 Venue Locking Release Handle Replacement Procedure

8-6-5-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-14.

8-6-5-2 Time Required

10 min

8-6-5-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-5-4 Handle Removal Procedure

1.) Remove cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

2.) Remove 4 screws from the upper end of arm assembly

3.) Remove black cable cover.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-88

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Remove 4 screws from the lower end of arm assembly and remove the lower black cover

5.) Remove 2 screws from handles.

6.) Remove 2 screws from spring metal brace part to release springs

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-89

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Slide out (on rail) black plastic screen locking release handle

8-6-5-5 Handle Installation Procedure

1.) Slide inwards new part in an angle and place round metal lock in place.

2.) Install 2 screws to set spring metal brace in place.

3.) Install 2 screws on handle.
4.) Install black cable cover on the lower end of pole and set with 4 screws.
5.) Install black cable cover on the upper end of pole and set with 4 screws.
6.) Install the cockpit

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

Venue Locking Release Handle Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-90

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-6 Riser Replacement Procedure

8-6-6-1 Tools
• Allen key 2.5 mm.
• LOCTITE® 243™
• Forged Steel Ring Pliers
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-14.

8-6-6-2 Time Required

10 min

8-6-6-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-6-4 Riser Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Left Side eTower cover,
Right Side eTower cover, Riser Thermal Cover and Upper Front eTower Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure
4.) Remove scanner arm.

• Arm Removal Procedure

5.) Loosen and remove four screws securing the riser cover to the riser.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-91

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Remove the riser cover.

Figure 8-74 Removing Riser Cover

7.) Remove the Teflon sliding top ring.

Figure 8-75 Removing Teflon Sliding Top Ring

Note: Ensure the pressure pin is not dropped (if exists)

Figure 8-76 Pressure Pin

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-92

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Remove four securing screws and remove the riser.

Figure 8-77 Removing Riser

8-6-6-5 Riser Installation Procedure

1.) Install new riser on the eTower.
2.) Apply LOCTITE® 243™ on the riser securing screws and tighten the screws.
3.) Install the Teflon sliding top ring.

Figure 8-78 Installing Teflon Sliding Top Ring

4.) Remove the masking tape holding the pressure pin; ensure the pin is not dropped

Figure 8-79 Pressure Pin

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-93

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Install the riser cover and secure with four screws.
6.) Install scanner arm.

• Arm Installation Procedure

7.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Left Side eTower cover, Right Side eTower
cover, Riser Thermal Cover, Upper Front eTower Cover and RS Probe cover.

• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure

• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
8.) Install the cockpit (monitor).

• Cockpit (Monitor) Installation Procedure

9.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

10.)Turn ON power to the system.

Venue Locking Release Handle Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-94

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-7 Casters Replacement Procedure

NOTE: The procedure below is the same whether replacing a No Lock Caster or a Directional and Brake Lock
Caster

NOTE: Make sure to install each type in its correct location.See Figure 8-81.

8-6-7-1 Tools
• Allen key 6mm
• LOCTITE® 243™
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-16.

8-6-7-2 Time Required

15 min

8-6-7-3 Preparations
Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.

Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-7-4 Casters Removal Procedure

1) Using a 6mm Allen key, loosen and remove the screw that secures the wheel shaft in the wheel
securing socket.
2) Lift the chassis sufficiently to allow the wheel to drop down out of the wheel securing socket.
3.) Remove the wheel.

Release the screw

Caster Wheels Disconnected

Figure 8-80 Removing the Caster Wheels

8-6-7-5 Casters Installation Procedure

1) Carefully lift the chassis sufficiently to allow insertion of the replacement wheel shaft into the wheel
securing socket.

Note: When installing the swivel lock wheel, lock the swivel before installing it to determine the
installation direction.

2) Push the wheel shaft all the way up into the socket, then gently lower the chassis to the ground.
3.) Apply LOCTITE® 243™ on the Allen screw.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-95

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Return and fasten the Allen screw, making sure the screw is tightened sufficiently to secure the
wheel on the chassis. Do not over-tighten the screw!

NOTE: When installing wheels, make sure you install the correct type of the wheel. The wheels position is
crossover.

Figure 8-81 Wheels Position in the System

5.) Carefully position the system on the ground.

Casters Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-96

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8 T-CFE Plastic Cable Guide Replacement Procedure

8-6-8-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-14.

8-6-8-2 Time Required

15 min

8-6-8-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-8-4 Plastic Cable Guide for CFE Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Riser Thermal Cover

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Open the two fastening latches on the left side of the FE door assembly, loosen the captive screw
and carefully open the door. See Figure 8-82.
4.) Secure the door by clipping the door with door support- Figure 8-17.
5.) Remove the BIB cable from the Plastic Cable Guide for CFE as follows:
• Release the two screws.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-97

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Gently pull down the Plastic Cable Guide for CFE and disconnect the cable connector:

Figure 8-82 Disconnecting the PCIe Cable

6.) Loosen and remove the two screws securing the cable guide to CFE board and remove it.

Figure 8-83 Removing Plastic Cable Guide for CFE

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-98

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-5 Plastic Cable Guide for CFE Installation Procedure

1.) Install the new Plastic Cable Guide for CFE and slightly tighten the two screws to secure the cable
guide in its place.
2.) Reconnect the BIB cable to the Plastic Cable Guide for CFE.
3.) Return the FE door support to its place.
4) Close the FE door and close the two fastening latches on the left side of the Front End door
assembly.
5.) Tighten the captive screw.
6.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, Right side eTower and RS Probe
cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system.

T-CFE Plastic Cable Guide Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-99

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9 MPB Blower (Fan) Replacement Procedure

8-6-9-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-16.

8-6-9-2 Time Required

10 min

8-6-9-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-9-4 MPB Blower (Fan) Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

4.) Disconnect MPB to BIB Control Cable from the fan cable connector.

MPB to BIB
Control Cable

Figure 8-84 Disconnecting Fan Cable Connector

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-100

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Loosen the elastic spring slings that hold the fan and carefully remove the MPB fan.

Elastic
spring sling

Figure 8-85 Removing the MPB Fan

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-101

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9-5 MPB Fan Installation Procedure

1.) Carefully insert the new MPB fan into the fan sleeve.
2.) Tighten the elastic spring slings to secure the fan in its place.

Figure 8-86 Tightening Elastic Spring Slings

3.) Reconnect the MPB to BIB Control Cable to the fan cable connector.

Figure 8-87 Installing the MPB Fan

4) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-102

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Install the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower and RS
Probe cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB Blower (Fan) Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-103

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10 IPP Module Replacement Procedure

8-6-10-1 Tools
Appropriate open-end wrench

Multimeter

Nose pliers

Appropriate short Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-19.

8-6-10-2 Time Required

10 min

8-6-10-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-6-10-4 IPP Module Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, and MPB Front Metal Door
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure
3.) Remove the MPB Power Door.

• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

4.) Remove battery modules.

• Battery Module Removal Procedure

5.) Remove the PSU module.

• PSU Module Removal Procedure

6.) Remove the MPB module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-104

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Remove the three screws that hold the IPP metal frame.

Figure 8-88 Removing IPP Holding Screws

8.) Using the nose pliers (or flat head screwdriver) squeeze the white plastic connector holders and
push them out to remove the power connector.

System back System front

Connector holder

Connector holder

Figure 8-89 Removing Power Connector

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-105

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) Using the open-end wrench, disconnect the ground cable.

Ground cable

Figure 8-90 Disconnecting Ground Cable

10.)Remove the IPP module.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-106

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-5 IPP Module Installation Procedure

1.) Attach the new IPP module on the MPB receptical and secure with three screws.
2.) Connect the power connector from the front of the system. Make sure the connector orientation is
correct.
3.) Connect the ground cable.
4.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

5.) Install the PSU module.

• PSU Module Installation Procedure

6.) Install the Battery modules.

• Battery Module Installation Procedure

7.) Install the MPB Power Door.

• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure

8.) Refit the following covers: MPB Front Metal Door, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower, Lower Front
eTower, and RS Probe cover.
• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
9.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

10.)Turn ON power to the system.

IPP Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-107

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-7
Cables - Replacement Procedures
8-7-1 MPB Rear USB Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-1-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-1-2 Time Required

10 min

8-7-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-1-4 MPB Rear USB Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the battery packs to gain access to the MPB module.

• Battery Module Removal Procedure

5.) Remove the PSU module.

• PSU Module Removal Procedure

6.) Unscrew the two mounting screws and remove the MPB module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-108

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Place the MPB module on a flat surface and disconnect the MPB Rear USB Cable connector to the
MPB J12 Connector.

MPB to Rear USB Cable - To MPB J12 Connector

Figure 8-91 Disconnecting MPB Rear USB Cable - To MPB J12 Connector

8.) Using Phillips screwdriver, disconnect the two screws that hold the cable connector to the rear
panel and remove the cable.

MPB to Rear USB Cable - To Rear Panel Connector (side 2)

MPB to Rear USB Cable - To Rear Panel Connector (side 1)

Figure 8-92 Disconnecting MPB Rear USB Cable - To Rear Panel Connector

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-109

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-1-5 MPB Rear USB Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the MPB to Rear USB Cable to the rear panel connector and tighten the two screws
(previously removed).
2.) Connect the USB cable connector to the MPB J12 connector.
3.) Install the MPB module and tighten the two mounting screws.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

4.) Install the PSU module.

• PSU Module Installation Procedure

5.) Install the battery pack units.

• Battery Module Installation Procedure

6) Install MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

7.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, Right side eTower and RS Probe
cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
8.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

9.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB Rear USB Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-110

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-2 MPB TO Cockpit Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-2-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver

8-7-2-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-2-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-2-4 MPB TO Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower, and Riser
Thermal covers,,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure

3) Perform MPB removal procedure.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

4.) For systems with rear cockpit cable cover installed, perform the following steps:
a.) Disconnect the Wi-Fi adapter.

• Wi-Fi Adapter Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-111

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

b.) Release the four Phillips screws and remove the rear cable cover.

Figure 8-93 Removing Rear Cable Cover

5.) Disconnect the MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE from the monitor:

• Disconnect the cable connector (use flat-head screwdriver).
• Release Ground cable (use Phillips screwdriver).

Figure 8-94 MPB TO COCKPIT Cable and Cockpit Ground Cables Removal

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-112

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Gently pull out the MPB to Cockpit cable from the axis tilt.
7.) Release the MPB to Cockpit cable from the arm:
a.) Carefully raise the arm to its up position
b.) Remove the arm base cover

Figure 8-95 Removing Arm Base Cover

c.) Using Phillips screwdriver, remove the two securing screws of the arm side cover.
d.) Slide the right-side arm side cover upwards and remove it.

Figure 8-96 Removing Arm Side Covers

8.) Cut the tie wraps securing the MPB TO COCKPIT cable to the arm right side, and release the cable
from the arm.

Figure 8-97 Arm Side Cable: Removing Tie Wraps

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-113

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) Route the cable and its connector downwards through the arm hole.

Figure 8-98 Route Cable Through Arm Hole

10.)Release plastic clips that hold the cable using a flat screwdriver:
• Three clips in the Front End
• Two clips between the connectors and the MPB receptacle side.

Figure 8-99 Plastic Clips Holding the Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-114

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

11.)Disconnect J1 and J2 connectors by sliding the connectors upwards from the MPB receptacle side.

Figure 8-100 Disconnecting J1, J2 connectors

12.)Gently slide the MPB TO COCKPIT cable upwards, ensuring not to pull and cause damage to the
other cables.
13.)) Open cable cover door:
- Open the captive screw of the cable cover door using a Phillips screwdriver.
- Slide the cable cover door towards you, to free the cable
- Slide the cable connectors upwards and gently route them- one after the other - through the
door, with the rubber grommet.

Figure 8-101 Disconnecting MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE

14.)Pull the MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE.

The cable is released.
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-115
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-2-5 MPB TO Cockpit Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Remove ferrite clip from MPB to Cockpit cable.

Figure 8-102 Removing Ferrite from Cable

2.) Route the MPB to Cockpit cable through the articulated arm, so that the length of the exposed cable
toward the cockpit is minimum 44 cm. Do not use tie wraps to secure cable in place.

44 cm

Figure 8-103 Routing MPB to Cockpit Cable - Measuring 44 cm

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-116

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Remove the lower and then the upper cockpit covers.

Upper cover removed

Lower cover removed

Figure 8-104 Removing Upper and Lower Cockpit Covers

4.) Apply moderate force and route the MPB to Cockpit cable through the tilt axis, keeping the routed
cable on the most left, and the connector facing to the right. Make sure it is routed above the tilt
release cable wire.

Connector facing
to the right

Figure 8-105 Routing the MPB to Cockpit Cable through Tilt Axis

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-117

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Reattach ferrite to the MPB to Cockpit cable, approximately 3 cm below the cable connector.

3 cm

Figure 8-106 Attaching Ferrite to MPB to Cockpit Cable

6.) Connect the MPB to Cockpit cable to the cockpit, and fasten the flat screws.

Figure 8-107 Connecting the MPB to Cockpit Cable to Cockpit

7.) Reconnect the ground cable.

8.) Make sure the MPB to Cockpit cable is routed under the pin that is located on the rear side of the

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-118

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

monitor, as shown below.

Route cable under the pin

Figure 8-108 Routing the MPB to Cockpit Cable under the Pin

9.) Refit the cockpit upper and then the lower covers.
10.)Route the MPB to Cockpit cable through the cable cover door and the arm hole.

Figure 8-109 Routing the MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE

11.)Connect the MPB TO COCKPIT CABLE to the monitor:

• Connect the cable connector (use flat-head screwdriver).
• Connect Ground cable (use Phillips screwdriver).

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-119

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

12.)Measure 30 cm of cable between the connector and the arm.

Figure 8-110 Measuring 30 cm of the Cable

13.)Secure cable to arm using tie wraps.

Figure 8-111 Securing the Cable to Arm

14.)Gently slide the MPB TO COCKPIT cable through the MPB receptacle side, towards the front.
15.)Reconnect J1 and J2 connectors ensuring the connectors' arrow is pointing upwards.

Figure 8-112 Reconnecting J1 and J2 Connectors

16.)Secure the cable to the plastic clips:

• Three in the front end

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-120

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Two between the connectors and the MPB receptacle side.

Figure 8-113 Plastic Clips Holding the Cable

17.)Close the cable cover door:

• Slide the cable cover door towards the system, and fix the rubber grommet in its position
• Close the captive screw of the cable cover door using a Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 8-114 Closing Cable Cover Door

18.)Install the arm side cover.

19.)Secure side cover with two securing screws.
20.)Install the arm base cover.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-121

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

21.)Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

22.)Refit the following covers: Riser Thermal, Left Side eTower, Right Side eTower, Lower Front
eTower, and RS Probe cover.
• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
23.)Install the rear cockpit cable cover if exists.
24.)Connect the Wi-Fi dongle if exists.

• Wi-Fi Adapter Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Wi-Fi Adapter)

25.)nstall all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

26.)Turn ON power to the system.

Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-122

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3 BE to Cockpit Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-3-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat screwdriver
• 2.5 mm Allen key.
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-3-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-3-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-3-4 BE to Cockpit Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower,
Riser Thermal, and MPB Door cover,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Riser Thermal Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure
3.) Disconnect the BE TO COCKPIT CABLE from the monitor:
• Disconnect the cable connector (use flat-head screwdriver)
• Release Ground cable (use Phillips screwdriver).

Figure 8-115 Cockpit (Monitor) Cable and Cockpit Ground Cables Removal
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-123
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) For systems with rear cockpit cable cover installed, perform the following steps:
a.) Disconnect the Wi-Fi adapter.

• Wi-Fi Adapter Removal Procedure

b.) Release the four Phillips screws and remove the rear cable cover.

Figure 8-116 Removing Rear Cable Cover

c.) Gently pull out the BE to Cockpit cable from the axis tilt.
5.) Release the BE to Cockpit cable from the arm:
a.) Carefully raise the arm to its up position.
b.) Remove the arm base cover.

Figure 8-117 Removing Arm Base Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-124

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

c.) Using Allen key, remove the two securing screws of the arm side cover.
d.) Slide the left-side arm side cover upwards and remove it.

Figure 8-118 Removing Arm Side Covers

6.) Cut the tie wraps securing the BE to cockpit cable to the arm left side, and release the cable from
the arm.

Figure 8-119 Arm Side Cable: Removing Tie Wraps

7.) Route the cable and its connector downwards through the arm hole.

Figure 8-120 Route Cable Through Arm Hole

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-125

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Release the plastic clips that hold the cable using a flat screwdriver:
• Three in the front end
• One between the connectors and the MPB receptacle side.

Figure 8-121 Plastic Clips Holding the Cable

9.) Disconnect the Cockpit to BEP split cable connected to BE module (green USB connector and black
display port connector).

Figure 8-122 Disconnecting Cables Connected to BE Module

10.)Open cable cover door:

a.) Open the captive screw of the cable cover door using a Phillips screwdriver.
b.) Slide the cable cover door towards you, to free the cable
c.) Slide the cable connectors upwards and gently route them- one after the other - through the

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-126

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

door, with the rubber grommet.

Figure 8-123 Releasing the BE to Cockpit Cable

The cable is released.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-127

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-5 BE to Cockpit Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Route BE to Cockpit Cable through arm, so that the cable length that remains exposed to the
cockpit direction is minimum 35cm.

35 cm

Figure 8-124 Routing BE to Cockpit Cable - Measuring 35 cm

2.) Remove the lower and then the upper cockpit covers.

Upper cover removed

Lower cover removed

Figure 8-125 Removing Upper and Lower Cockpit Covers

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-128

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Route the BE to Cockpit cable trough cockpit tilt axis. For easier routing, make sure the cable is
aligned to the left.

Figure 8-126 Routing BE to Cockpit Cable through Tilt Axis

4.) Connect the BE to Cockpit cable DP connector to the cockpit.

Figure 8-127 Connecting BE to Cockpit Cable to the Cockpit

5.) Reconnect the ground cable.

6.) Refit the cockpit upper and then the lower covers.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-129

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Route the BE TO COCKPIT cable through the cable cover door and the arm hole.

Figure 8-128 Route Cable Through Arm Hole

8.) Connect the BE TO COCKPIT CABLE to the monitor

• Connect the cable connector (use flat-head screwdriver)
• Connect Ground cable (use Phillips screwdriver).

Figure 8-129 Securing Cable to Arm

9.) Gently slide the BE TO COCKPIT cable through the MPB receptacle side, towards the front.
10.)Reconnect the Cockpit to BEP split cable connected to BE module (green and black). Ensure the
cables are connected to the correct locations (see cable diagram below).

Figure 8-130 Reconnecting the BR Module Cables

11.)Secure the cable to the plastic clips.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-130

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Three in the front end

• One between the connectors and the MPB receptacle side.

Figure 8-131 Plastic Clips Holding the Cable

12.)Close the cable cover door:

• Slide the cable cover door towards the system, and fix the rubber grommet in its position
• Close the captive screw of the cable cover door using a Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 8-132 Closing Cable Cover Door

13.)Install the arm side cover.

14.)Secure side cover with two securing screws.
15.)Install the arm base cover.
16.)Refit the following covers: Left Side eTower, Riser Thermal, Right Side eTower, Lower Front

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-131

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

eTower, and RS Probe cover.

• Riser Thermal Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
17.)Install the rear cockpit cable cover if exists.
18.)Connect the Wi-Fi dongle if exists.

• Wi-Fi Adapter Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Wi-Fi Adapter)

19.)Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

20.)Turn ON power to the system.

Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-132

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-4 PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-4-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat screwdriver.
FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-4-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-4-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-4-4 PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the MPB module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the fan.

• MPB Blower (Fan) Removal Procedure

4.) Disconnect J8 to lower PSU connectors (see connectors' diagram below):

Figure 8-133 Connectors Diagram

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-133

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

a.) On each side of each connector, use a flat screwdriver to push one of the plastic flaps towards
the hole, and then push the other flap through the hole to release the connector.

Figure 8-134 Releasing the Connector

b.) From the front side, release both cable edges, by pulling the rubber towards you.

Figure 8-135 Releasing the Cable Edges

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-134

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

c.) Release the ground cable using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 8-136 Releasing the Ground Cable

5.) The cable is released.

Figure 8-137 Released Cable

8-7-4-5 PSU to MPB DC Docking Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the J8 and lower PSU connectors:
• From the front end, position the cable connectors in the J8 and lower PSU connectors, ensuring
the orientation is appropriate, by checking the plastic marks are pointing to the correct direction.
• Push the connectors' plastic hinges through the designated holes, until both hinges are fully
inside.
• Connect the ground cable using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver.
2.) Perform Fan installation procedure.

• MPB Fan Installation Procedure

3.) perform MPB installation procedure.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

4.) Turn ON power to the system

ON/OFF Switch Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-135

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-5 MPB to BE PWR Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-5-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

Flat screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-5-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-5-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-5-4 MPB to BE PWR Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe cover, Lower Front eTower, Side Covers, MPB Power Door
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Door Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the MPB Module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-136

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Disconnect the two lower cable connectors J4, J5 by sliding them upwards (see J-connectors map
that follows).

Figure 8-138 Disconnecting Two Lower Connectors

5.) Release the cable from the two plastic cable clips.

Figure 8-139 Releasing Cable from Plastic Cable Clips

The cable is released.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-137

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-5-5 MPB TO BE PWR Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the cable using the two plastic cable clips
2.) Connect the two lower cable connectors by sliding them downwards
3.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

4) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

5.) Refit the following covers: MPB Door Cover, Left and Right Side eTower Covers, Lower Front
eTower Cover, and RS Probe cover
• MPB Door Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-138

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-6 ON/OFF Switch Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-6-1 Tools
Flat screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-6-2 Time Required

10 min

8-7-6-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-6-4 ON/OFF Switch Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3.) Remove the battery packs to gain access to the MPB module.

• Battery Module Removal Procedure

4.) Unscrew the two mounting screws and remove the MPB module.

ON/OFF Switch Cable

Figure 8-140 Accessing ON/OFF Switch Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-139

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Place the MPB module on a flat surface and disconnect the following cable connectors:
• Disconnect the ON/OFF Switch cable connector from the MPB J10 connector.

To MPB J10 Connector

Figure 8-141 ON/OFF Switch Cable - To MPB J10 Connector

• Disconnect the ON/OFF Switch cable connector with the ON/OFF switch from the MPB module
by pressing the securing clips on both sides of the connector.

Securing clips

Figure 8-142 ON/OFF Switch Cable with ON/OFF Switch - Connection to MPB Module

6.) Remove the ON/OFF Switch Cable.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-140

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-6-5 ON/OFF Switch Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the ON/OFF Switch cable connector to the MPB J10 connector.
2.) Connect the other ON/OFF Switch cable connector to the MPB module by pressing the securing
clips on both sides of the connector.
3.) Install the MPB module and tighten the two mounting screws.
4.) Install the battery pack units.

• Battery Module Installation Procedure

5.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, left side eTower, Right side eTower and RS Probe
cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

ON/OFF Switch Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-141

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-7 PCIe Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-7-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-7-2 Time Required

10 min

8-7-7-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-7-4 PCIe Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower.

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Remove the BE module.

• BE Module Removal Procedure

4.) Disconnect one side of the PCIe cable from the BIB board and the other side from the BE module.
5.) Remove the PCIe cable.

PCIe cable location

PCIe cable connectors

Figure 8-143 Disconnecting PCIe Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-142

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-7-5 PCIe Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the new PCIe cable to the BIB board and to the BE module.
2.) Install the BE module.

• BE Module Installation Procedure

3.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
4.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

5.) Turn ON power to the system.

PCIe Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-143

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-8 MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-8-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver.

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-23.

8-7-8-2 Time Required

10 min

8-7-8-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-8-4 MPB to BIB Control Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower.
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

4.) Remove the MPB module.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

5.) Disconnect the cable from the BIB board.

Figure 8-144 Disconnecting MPB to BIB Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-144

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Disconnect MPB to BIB Control Cable from the fan cable connector.

MPB to BIB
Control Cable -
Fan Connector

Figure 8-145 Disconnecting Fan Cable Connector

7.) Release plastic clips that hold the cable.

Figure 8-146 Releasing MPB to BIB Control Cable from Plastic Clips

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-145

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8.) Slide up and disconnect the other side of the MPB to BIB Control Cable from the J6 connector.

J6 Connector

Figure 8-147 Disconnecting MPB to BIB Control Cable from J6 Connector

9.) Remove the MPB to BIB Control cable.

8-7-8-5 MPB to BIB Control Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect one side of the MPB to BIB Control Cable to the J6 connector. Make sure the arrow on the
cable connector is facing up.
2.) Connect the other side of the MPB to BIB Control Cable to the blower cable connector.
3.) Secure the cable with plastic clips.
4.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

5) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

6.) Install the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower and RS
Probe cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-146

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-9 Printer USB Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-9-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-27.

8-7-9-2 Time Required

5 min

8-7-9-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-9-4 Printer USB Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
3.) Remove the MPB Front Metal Door

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

Printer USB Cable

Figure 8-148 Printer Insert Cover Removed

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-147

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Loosen the Phillips screw and remove the Peripheral Cable Cover.

Figure 8-149 Disconnecting the Printer Cable

5.) Disconnect the printer cable (yellow USB connector) from the Back End assembly.

8-7-9-5 Printer USB Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the new printer cable to the Back End assembly.
2.) Route the printer cable through the dedicated cable opening in the eTower.
3.) Attach the Peripheral Cable Cover and secure with Phillips captive screw.

NOTE: Make sure the Peripheral Cable Cover is properly aligned and affixed.

4) Install MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

5.) Refit the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
6.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

7.) Turn ON power to the system.

Printer USB Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-148

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-10 BEP Cables Replacement Procedure

8-7-10-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver
• Socket Wrench

8-7-10-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-10-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-10-4 BEP Cables Removal Procedure

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, and Right Side eTower,
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

3.) Perform BE module removal procedure.

• BE Module Removal Procedure

4.) Remove omega bracket: release 5 screws connecting the omega bracket:

Figure 8-150 BE Omega Bracket Removal

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-149
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

5.) Remove the supporting bracket using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver:

• Release two captive screws
• Release two screws at the bottom of the bracket

Figure 8-151 Removing BE Supporting Bracket

6.) Release the following cable connectors:

• SATA DATA BE TO SSD A (red cable): press the latch and pull the cable connector out
• SSD PWR cable: Gently pull the connector towards you

Figure 8-152 Disconnect SATA DATA and SSD PWR Cables

7.) Disconnect the following cables at the back of the BE:

• Two USB connectors
• Network cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-150

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Display port

Figure 8-153 Disconnect BE Cables from BE Back

8.) Remove the PCB:

• Release four screws in the PCB corners using Phillips screwdriver

Figure 8-154 Remove PCB

Note: If the MiTx to BIB cable is preventing easy removal of the PCB, disconnect the MiTx to BIB
cable connector latch (see yellow circle in the above figure).

• Gently take out the PCB.

9.) The cables are now exposed and easy to access. Disconnect the relevant cable that is being
replaced:
• USB split cable (use socket wrench 5.5mm)
• HDMI cable (use socket wrench 5.5mm)
• Network cable (use socket wrench 5.5mm)

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-151

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• SATA PWR cable

• SATA DATA (BE to SSD) cable

Figure 8-155 Remove PCB

• MiTx to BIB cable: release one connector on the BIB and pull upwards two connectors on the
BEP PCB

Figure 8-156 MiTx to BiB Cable Removal

8-7-10-5 BEP Cables Installation Procedure

1.) Reconnect the cable(s) that was/were removed:
• USB split cable
• HDMI cable
• Network cable
• SATA PWR cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-152

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2.) Route the cables on the BEP bottom bracket as shown below

Figure 8-157 Route cables on BEP Bottom Bracket

3.) Reconnect the PCB using four screws in the PCB corners using Phillips screwdriver

Figure 8-158 Reconnect PCB

4.) Reconnect the following cables at the back of the BE:

• Two USB connectors
• Network cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-153

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Display port

Figure 8-159 Reconnect BE Cables from BE Back

5.) Reconnect the following cable connectors:

• SATA DATA BE TO SSD A (red cable)
• SSD PWR cable

Figure 8-160 Reconnect SATA DATA and SSD PWR Cables

6.) Reconnect the supporting bracket using an appropriate Phillips screwdriver:

• Two captive screws

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-154

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Two screws at the bottom of the bracket

Figure 8-161 Reconnecting BE Supporting Bracket

7.) Reconnect omega bracket: attach 5 screws connecting the omega bracket

Figure 8-162 BE Omega Bracket Repositioning

8.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

9.) Install MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

10.)Refit the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-155

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

11.)Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

12.)Turn ON power to the system.

Back End (BE) Module Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-156

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-11 MPB TO T-FEPS - FRU Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-11-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver

8-7-11-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-11-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-11-4 MPB TO T-FEPS Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Perform MPB removal procedure.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

2.) Disconnect the following cables connected to BE module:

• MPB to BIB
• MPB to BEP (white)
• Cockpit to BEP split cable (green and black)
• Printer cable (yellow)

Figure 8-163 Disconnecting Cables Connected to BE Module

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-157

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Disconnect the MPB TO T-FEPS cable edge

Figure 8-164 Disconnecting MPB to T-FEPS Cable Edge

4.) Disconnect the two lower cable connectors by sliding them upwards
5.) The cable is released.

8-7-11-5 MPB TO T-FEPS Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the two lower cable connectors by sliding them downwards
2.) Connect the MPB TO T-FEPS cable edge
3.) Connect the following cables to BE module:
• MPB to BIB
• MPB to BEP (white)
• Cockpit to BEP split cable (green and black)
• Printer cable (yellow)
4.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

5) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

6.) Install the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower and RS
Probe cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-158

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system

Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-159

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-12 MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Replacement Procedure

8-7-12-1 Tools
• Appropriate Phillips screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver

8-7-12-2 Time Required

15 min

8-7-12-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-7-12-4 MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Removal Procedure

1.) Perform MPB removal procedure.

• MPB Module Removal Procedure

2.) Release the cable from the plastic cable clips using a screwdriver

Figure 8-165 Disconnecting Cable Clips

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-160

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 8-166 Disconnecting Cable Clips

3.) Release the cable from the upper plastic cable clips

Figure 8-167 Release Cable from Upper Plastic Cable Clips

4.) If a printer is used:

• Release the printer plastic cable clips routed upwards.
• Loosen the Phillips screw and remove the Peripheral Cable Cover.

Figure 8-168 Disconnecting the Printer Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-161

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Disconnect the printer cable (yellow USB connector) from the Back End assembly.

Figure 8-169 Release Cable according to Configuration

5.) Disconnect the MPB to BEP (white) cable connected to BE module.

Figure 8-170 Disconnecting Cables Connected to BE Module

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-162

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Release the J3 peripherals connector

Figure 8-171 Release Cable from J3 Connector

7.) The cable is released.

8-7-12-5 MPB To Peripherals Harness - FRU Cable Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the cable to J3 connector
2.) Route the cable according to the configuration (if printer is used - route the cable upwards)
3.) Connect the cable to the plastic cable clips
4.) Install the MPB module.

• MPB Module Installation Procedure

5) Install the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

6.) Install the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side eTower and RS
Probe cover.
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

8.) Turn ON power to the system.

MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-163

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-8
Peripherals Replacement/Installation Procedures
8-8-1 Printer Replacement/Installation Procedure

8-8-1-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-27.

8-8-1-2 Time Required

10 min

8-8-1-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-1-4 Printer Removal Procedure

NOTE: Perform these steps only for Venue™ systems with printer already installed on them. For
systems with no previously installed printer, skip this section and proceed to section Printer
Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Printer)

1.) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2.) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.

• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-164

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-1-5 Printer Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Printer)

1.) Remove the Printer Insert Cover from the Upper eTower Cover.

• Printer Insert Cover Removal Procedure

2.) Install the Printer Frame Cover and secure with two Phillips screws.

Upper eTower Cover

..

..
Printer Frame Cover

Phillips screws

Figure 8-172 Installing Printer Frame Cover

3.) Remove the metal bracket. Use Phillips screwdriver.

..

Metal bracket

Figure 8-173 Removing Metal Bracket

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-165

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Remove the MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure

5.) Unclip the white plastic cable holder and release the two printer cables: Printer Power Cable and
Printer USB Cable

..
Unclip cable holder

Figure 8-174 Releasing Printer Cables

6.) Attach bracket to the Printer and tighten the four Phillips screws (the bracket and the screws are
supplied with the printer kit).

..

Figure 8-175 Attaching Bracket to Printer

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-166

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Insert the Printer Power Cable and Printer USB cable through the dedicated opening.

..

Figure 8-176 Printer Cables Routed Through Dedicated Opening

8.) Connect the Printer USB Cable and Printer Power Cables to the Printer.

..

Figure 8-177 Connecting Printer Cables

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-167

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) Attach the Printer to the eTower and secure with two bottom screws.

Figure 8-178 Attaching Printer to the eTower

10.)Attach the metal cable cover and secure the Phillips screw.

..

Metal cable cover

Figure 8-179 Attaching Metal Cable Cover

11) Install MPB Front Metal Door.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-168

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

12.)Refit the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower, Left side eTower, Right Side
eTower, Upper eTower Front Cover.
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
13.)Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

14.)Turn ON power to the system.

Printer USB Cable Replacement Procedure

8-8-1-6 Printer Installation Procedure (For Systems with Existing Printer)

1.) Perform Steps 8 - 14 of the section Printer Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing
Printer).

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-169

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-2 Wi-Fi Adapter Replacement/Installation Procedure

8-8-2-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-27.

8-8-2-2 Time Required

15 min

8-8-2-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-2-4 Wi-Fi Adapter Removal Procedure

NOTE: Perform these steps only for Venue™ systems with Wi-Fi adapter already installed on them.
For systems with no previously installed Wi-Fi adapter skip this section and proceed to section
Wi-Fi Adapter Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Wi-Fi Adapter)

1.) On the back of the cockpit, release four screws and remove the transparent Wi-Fi dongle cover.
2.) Disconnect the Wi-Fi dongle.

Figure 8-180 Wi-Fi Cover and Dongle Removal

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-170

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-2-5 Wi-Fi Adapter Installation Procedure (For Systems with No Existing Wi-Fi Adapter)
1.) Attach the L-shape USB adapter to the Wi-Fi dongle.

NOTE: Perform this step only for Venue™ systems with no previously installed Wi-Fi adapter. For
systems with existing Wi-Fi adapter, skip this step and proceed to Step 2.

Figure 8-181 Attaching L-shape USB Adapter to Wi-Fi Dongle

2.) Connect the L-shape USB adapter to the back of the Cockpit.
3.) Attach the transparent Wi-Fi dongle cover and secure with four screws.

8-8-2-6 Barcode Replacement Procedure

1.) Connect the Barcode to the system.

Figure 8-182 Attaching L-shape USB Adapter to Wi-Fi Dongle

2.) Wait for a few minutes for the system to accept the Barcode.
3.) Restart the system

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-171

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Note: The barcode device is detected by the system as a COM Port under windows device manager:.

Figure 8-183 Barcode detection in Device manager

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-172

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-3 ECG Installation Procedure for Systems with No Printer Installed

8-8-3-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-4-11.

8-8-3-2 Time Required

15 min

8-8-3-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-3-4 ECG Installation

1.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Upper Front eTower, and MPB Front Metal
Door, Printer Insert Cover.

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure
• Printer Insert Cover Removal Procedure

2.) Replace the printer insert cover with the one provided in the ECG installation kit.

Figure 8-184 Replacing Printer Insert Cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-173

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Attach ECG Bracket to printer bracket with 2 screws and 2 washers (verify correct orientation).

Figure 8-185 Attaching ECG Bracket to Printer Bracket

4.) Using two Thumb screws, install the bracket on the eTower.

Figure 8-186 Installing Bracket on the eTower

5.) Connect the ECG USB cable to the USB 2.0 port on the BEP above the Green connector.

Figure 8-187 Connecting ECG USB Cable

6.) Route the ECG USB cable through the dedicated opening in the eTower.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-174

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Attach grommet to the ECG USB cable.

Figure 8-188 Attaching Grommet to the ECG USB Cable

8.) Fold the excessive cable and use the cable clips to hold it.
9.) Attach the metal bracket to close the cable opening.

Figure 8-189 Attaching Metal Bracket

10.)Route the USB cable as shown below and connect the ECG USB cable to the ECG.

Figure 8-190 Connecting ECG to ECG USB Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-175

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

11.)Mount the ECG module and tighten the screw to fix the ECG module in place.

Figure 8-191 Fixing ECG Module

12.)Install the following covers: MPB Front Metal Door, Upper Front eTower, Lower Front eTower with
cutout for ECG.

• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure

• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-176

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-4 ECG Installation Procedure for Systems with Printer Installed

8-8-4-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-4-11.

8-8-4-2 Time Required

15 min

8-8-4-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-4-4 ECG Installation

1.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, Upper Front eTower, and MPB Front Metal
Door.

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
• MPB Front Metal Door Removal Procedure
2.) Disconnect printer USB and Power cables.

Figure 8-192 Disconnecting Printer Cables

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-177

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Unscrew the two thumbscrews holding the printer bracket and remove the printer with the bracket.

Figure 8-193 Disconnecting Printer

4.) Remove four screws connecting the printer to the bracket.

Figure 8-194 Disconnecting Printer

5.) Attach the ECG bracket to the printer bracket with 2 screws and 2 washers (verify correct
orientation).

Figure 8-195 Attaching ECG Bracket to Printer

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-178

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Attach the bracket to the printer using four screws.

Figure 8-196 Attaching Bracket to Printer

7.) Connect ECG USB cable to the USB 2.0 port on the BEP on top of the green connector.

Figure 8-197 Connecting ECG USB Cable

8.) Route the USB cable through the dedicated opening in the eTower and affix it along with the printer
USB cable.

Figure 8-198 Connecting ECG USB Cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-179

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) Install the metal bracket.

Figure 8-199 Installing Metal Bracket

10.)Connect the USB cable and power cable to the printer and the USB cable to the ECG module.
11.).Using two Thumb screws, install the bracket on the eTower.

Figure 8-200 Connecting Printer and ECG Cables

12.)Tighten the screw to fix the ECG module in place.

Figure 8-201 Connecting Printer and ECG Cables

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-180

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Fold the excessive cable and use the cable clips to hold it.

Figure 8-202 Connecting Printer and ECG Cables

14.)Install the following covers: MPB Front Metal Door, Upper Front eTower, Lower Front eTower with
cutout for ECG.
• MPB Front Metal Door Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-181

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-5 ECG Replacement Procedure

8-8-5-1 Tools
Appropriate Phillips screwdriver

FRU Part # Refer to Table 9-4-11.

8-8-5-2 Time Required

15 min

8-8-5-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-5-4 ECG Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the following covers: Lower Front eTower, and Upper Front eTower.

• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure
2.) Release the screw that secures the ECG module in place.

Figure 8-203 Releasing ECG Securing Screw

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-182

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Gently pull out the ECG module.

Figure 8-204 Pulling Out ECG

4.) Disconnect the USB cable and remove the ECG.

Figure 8-205 Removing ECG

8-8-5-5 ECG Installation Procedure

1.) Connect ECG to the USB cable.
2.) Insert the ECG module all the way in.
3.) Tighten the ECG securing screw.
4.) Install the following covers: Upper Front eTower, Lower Front eTower.
• Upper eTower Front Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-183

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-6 Wireless Probe Charger Replacement Procedure

8-8-6-1 Tools
N/A

8-8-6-2 Time Required

3 min

8-8-6-3 Preparations
1.) Lock all cart casters.

8-8-6-4 Wireless probe Charger Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the Wireless probe from the probe charger.
2.) Disconnect the wireless probe cable coming from the arm: turn the connector edges until the
fastening latch is aligned with the cavity, and pull it out gently..

Figure 8-206 Disconnect wireless charger cable

3.) Remove the charger from the handle

8-8-6-5 Wireless probe Charger Installation Procedure

1) Install the wireless charger on the handle (customer facing)
2.) Connect the wireless probe cable coming through the arm, to the charger
3.) Place the wireless probe in the wireless probe charger.

Perform the checks listed in Table 8-13 - Cart Cables section

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-184

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-7 Extension cable for WIFI/BT Replacement Procedure

8-8-7-1 Tools
N/A

8-8-7-2 Time Required

3 min

8-8-7-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the Venue™ ultrasound unit, as described in Power Shutdown.
2.) Make sure the On/Off power switch is set to Off.
3.) Make sure the system is standing securely on a level surface, with the wheels in the locked position.

8-8-7-4 Extension cable for WIFI/BT Removal Procedure

1) Remove all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

2) Remove the following covers: RS Probe Cover, Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower
Cover and Left Side eTower Cover:.
• RS Probe Cover Removal Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Right Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Removal Procedure

3) Remove the Upper eTower Front Cover.:.

• Upper eTower Front Cover Removal Procedure

4.) Disconnect the WIFI and BT dongles from the cable and then disconnect the stickers connecting

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-185

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

the cable to the tower

Figure 8-207 Disconnect BT/WIFI dongles and release the cable from the tower

5.) Pull the cable out through the printer door cover.

Figure 8-208 Pull cable through printer door cover

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-186

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Disconnect the cable from the BE (Back End) module..

Figure 8-209 Disconnect extension cable from BE

NOTE: Reaching the connector may be easier by removing the BE unit. If needed - remove the BE
module; Remove the cable from the yellow connector, and then return the BE module to the cart

8-8-7-5 Extension cable for WIFI/BT charger Installation Procedure

1) Route the BT/WIFI cable through the printer door cover, and cover the cable with rubber grommet.
2.) Route the new BT/WIFI cable previously inserted through the printer door cover, through the tower
front towards the BE (Back End) module, and connect it to the dedicated (yellow) connector.
3.) Attach the cable WIFI and BT connectors to the tower, according to the label previously attached
to chassis
4.) Connect Netgear WIFI dongle to extension cable.
5.) Connect BT dongle to extension cable

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-187

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

6.) Refit the following covers: Lower Front eTower cover, Right Side eTower Cover and the Left Side
eTower Cover and RS Probe Cover.
• Right Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Left Side eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• Lower Front eTower Cover Installation Procedure
• RS Probe Cover Installation Procedure
7.) Install all accessories.

• Accessories - Replacement Procedures

Perform the checks listed in Table 8-13 - Cart Cables section

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-188

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-9
Operating System and Application Software Loading Procedures
8-9-1 Software Update Procedure
NOTE: Images in this procedure are for reference only. There may be differences or variations, in accordance
with different software versions.

1.) Disconnect all probes.

2.) Plug the Software Installation Media into the USB port located on the Interface Panel of the
Venue™.
3.) Turn on the system.
The opening screen is displayed.

4.) Select Update Venue SW to install software without affecting user data.

Figure 8-210 Venue™ Software loading menu

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-189

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The following Warning message appears:

Figure 8-211 Venue™ Partition C - Warning Message

5.) Click Yes in the Warning message box.

6.) Automatic installation process runs. At the end of the process, the following message appears:

Figure 8-212 Venue™ Software - Installation Options

7.) Click Reboot Venue Scanner. Wait until the INFORMATION dialog box appears:

Figure 8-213 Venue™ Installation Process- Information Dialog Box

8.) Disconnect the SW installation media and tap OK in the message box.
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-190
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9.) In the Confirmation dialog box that appears, tap Yes to continue the reboot.:

Figure 8-214 Venue™ Installation Process- Confirmation Dialog Box

10.)Tap Yes to continue the reboot.

11.)After the system reboots, the Venue™ setup wizard welcome screen appears:
12.)Select the interface language and tap OK to proceed.

Figure 8-215 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Welcome Screen

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-191

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Tap Run wizard to continue the installation.

Figure 8-216 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Run Wizard

14.)Enter the system serial number and tap OK to confirm.

Figure 8-217 Venue™ Installation Process- Set Serial Number

15.)Tap OK to confirm the serial number.

Figure 8-218 Venue™ Installation Process- Confirm Serial Number

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-192
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

16.)The settings screen appears. The Local tab opens by default.

17.)Continue with the EZ Config installation as specified in Section 3-6-2-1 on page 3-20.

Operating System and Application Software Installation Procedure

8-9-1-1 Reformatting Disk-on-Key

The purpose of this procedure is to allow the user to format the disk-on-key and to regain the initial
storage capacity of the media used for burning software downloaded from GE HealthCare portal.

1.) On your PC, insert the Disk-on-Key media into any available USB port.
2.) Browse to the folder that contains the files downloaded from GE HealthCare portal.
3.) Run the RevertFlashDisk.cmd command.

NOTE: If the Windows Protected Your PC window pops up, click More Info and then click Run Anyway.

If prompted to allow apps to make changes to device, click Yes.

4.) Wait until the formatting is complete. The process may take about 3 minutes.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-193

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-2 Software Upgrade Procedure to Venue™ R5 Software

WARNING YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A BACKUP
MEDIA BEFORE PERFORMING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURE.
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO WRITE DOWN THE TCP/ IP ADDRESS AND THE WIRELESS
NETWORK SETTINGS (IF EXIST) AS THESE SETTINGS WILL BE LOST DURING THE
UPGRADE PROCEDURE.

NOTE: Images in this procedure are for reference only. There may be differences or variations, in accordance
with different software versions.

NOTICE IMPORTANT Before starting the upgrade procedure, make sure you received a new Activation String
in the upgrade kit.

8-9-2-1 Backup of System Configuration

Perform backup of all system configuration parameters as follows:

1.) Log in to the system as ADM (administrator).

Figure 8-219 Logging In as ADM

2.) Tap Settings and select Config.

3.) On the Connectivity tab, select Dataflow and make sure the USB Storage option is enabled.

Figure 8-220 Backup Options Tab

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-194
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) Connect USB memstick to any available USB port in the system.
5.) From the side menu, select Admin and then Backup.

Figure 8-221 Backup Options Tab

6.) Select the System Configuration checkbox.

7.) Select USB HD/Memstick media as a Destination Device.
8.) Tap Start Backup.

Figure 8-222 Backup Options to Select

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-195

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

After the backup is complete, the following message appears:

Figure 8-223 Backup Complete Message

9.) Eject the USB memstick when prompted.

8-9-2-2 Backup of Patient Exams

1.) Connect an external USB 3.0 hard drive with at least 100GB of free space.
2.) Tap the Patient tab and select Ext Sources.

Figure 8-224 Ext Sources Tab

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-196

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

3.) Select the Select All checkbox to select all patients for backup.

Figure 8-225 Select All Patients for Backup

4.) Tap Send Selected.

Figure 8-226 Send Selected Button

5.) In the Copy window, select USB Storage and click OK.

Figure 8-227 Copy Window

NOTICE IMPORTANT Make sure the selected option is USB Storage and not DICOM USB.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-197

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The selected data is copied. The backup process is indicated on the progress bar that appears.

Figure 8-228 Copying Patients Dialog

6.) After the backup is complete, proceed to Software Upgrade Procedure.

8-9-2-3 Software Upgrade Procedure

1.) Disconnect all probes.
2.) Plug the Venue R5 Software Installation Media into the USB port located on the Interface Panel of
the Venue™.
3.) Turn on the system.
The opening screen is displayed.

4.) Select Format Hard Drive and Load Venue SW.

Figure 8-229 Venue™ Software - Installation Options

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-198

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

The Warning message appears:

Figure 8-230 Venue™ Partition C - Warning Message

NOTICE IMPORTANT Venue R2/R3 user presets are not compatible with R5 software. The backed up presets
can only be used if reverting back to previous software version. Do not try to import these presets to R5
software.

5.) Click Yes in the Warning message box.

6.) Automatic installation process runs. At the end of the process, the following message appears:
7.) Click Reboot Venue Scanner. Wait until the INFORMATION dialog box appears:

Figure 8-231 Venue™ Installation Process- Information Dialog Box

8.) Disconnect the SW installation media and tap OK in the message box.
9.) In the Confirmation dialog box that appears, tap Yes to continue the reboot.:

Figure 8-232 Venue™ Installation Process- Confirmation Dialog Box

10.)Tap Yes to continue the reboot.

11.)After the system reboots, the Venue™ setup wizard welcome screen appears:

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-199

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

12.)Select the interface language and tap OK to proceed.

Figure 8-233 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Welcome Screen

13.)Tap Run wizard to continue the installation.

Figure 8-234 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Run Wizard

14.)The settings screen appears. The Local tab opens by default.

NOTE: Due to FPGAs programming as part of the initialization process, it might take up to 15 minutes before
the Local tab is displayed.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-200

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Note: In case of firmware update errors, the following messages may appear :

Figure 8-235 Venue™ Setup Wizard - Firmware Update Errors

• Follow the procedure displayed in the window

15.)Type in the option key and configure the network settings
16.)Continue with the EZ Config installation as specified in Section 3-6-2-1.
17.)Open: Config screen >> Imaging >> Advanced Tools and make sure the Auto zone increment

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-201

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

check box is NOT selected.

Figure 8-236 Auto zone increment check box

Operating System and Application Software Installation Procedure

18.)Verify that an e-label is displayed in Config screen under the About tab as shown below:

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-202

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Note: For every upgrade performed a new eLabel shall appear under the Config about tab

Figure 8-237 Example of a system upgraded from R1 to R2 to R3 - Venue™ Upgrade eLabels

19.)Scan the UDI label that is attached to the installation media. Refer to Figure 8-238 as reference
only. always use the actual label.

Figure 8-238 Example of UDI label attached to Software installation media Label

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-203

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-3 Software Installation Procedure - General Overview

The Venue™ ultrasound scanner software loading options provide the ability to install the Windows
operating system and the Venue™ application software.

The complete installation procedure can be performed using the Touch Screen only. An on-screen
(virtual) keyboard is available whenever text input is required. I

WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL SOFTWARE THAT WAS NOT DESIGNATED FOR YOUR
VENUE™ UNIT. ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL UN-APPROVED SOFTWARE WILL CAUSE
IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE!

NOTICE IMPORTANT Since neither the System Serial Number or the Computer Name can be changed after the
software installation procedure is completed, it is important to make sure that when prompted, the
correct information is inserted during the installation procedure.

When installing the Windows operating system software, after replacement of the SSD module, it is
necessary to format the hard disk.
Be aware that this will perform a full format of the Hard Disk and all patient data will be lost.

Normally, the Venue™ system is supplied with the software already installed. In some cases, it is
necessary to re-install the software.

WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE

DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO
BACKUP MEDIA BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE INSTALLATION.

NOTE: After performing a software installation, all logs are deleted. It is recommended that these
should be recorded should they be needed in the future.

NOTICE IMPORTANT Before performing any Venue™ software installation procedure, it is mandatory to
backup the Archive.

If you are upgrading the system software from a previous version, it is necessary to contact your local
OTR department to receive an appropriate software password. Make sure you specify the system serial
number located on the Venue™ unit.

8-9-3-1 Preparation for Software Installation Procedures

NOTE: Make sure that the required Software Option keys are available prior to commencing the installation
process. Do not use the Software Option keys from a previous system version.

CAUTION THIS PROCESS FORMATS THE HARD DRIVE (WHEN SELECTION OF THIS OPTION IS
APPLICABLE) - MAKE SURE TO SAVE ALL THE REQUIRED PRESETS, SETTINGS AND
PATIENT DATA!

WARNING REMOVE ALL EXTERNAL DEVICES SUCH AS PRINTERS AND USB CONNECTIONS
BEFORE STARTING THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE.
At the site, perform the following steps before you start the upgrade procedure:

1.) Perform Disk Management for all database records and select the "Copy" option
(for instructions, refer to the Venue™ User Manual on your Document Media).

NOTE: It is recommended that Disk Management be executed using the "move" option to a network
repository.
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-204
P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

2.) Perform a full back-up for Patient Archive and System Configuration
(for instructions, refer to the Venue™ User Manual on your Document Media).
3.) Write down the following settings as it will be necessary to restore them at the end of the process:
- TCP/IP address
- Network printer (if present)
- Wireless network settings (if present)
- InSite ExC settings
4.) When done, continue to Table 8-13.

8-9-3-2 Operating System and/or Application Software Installation Procedure

NOTE: A minimum of 1 hour is required to install both the Windows operating system and the Venue™
application software. This excludes preparation time, backup etc. and performing functional checks
following the installation procedures.

Throughout the installation processes, the Venue™ system will be unavailable for scanning.

Section Section 8-9 on page 8-189 provides step-by-step instructions for installation of Windows
operating system software and Venue™ ultrasound scanner software application.

It is necessary to perform the recommended Functionality Checks after completion of the installation
procedures

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-205

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-4 Software Installation Procedure

NOTE: Images in this procedure are for reference only. There may be differences or variations, in accordance
with different software versions.

1.) Disconnect all probes.

2.) Plug the Software Installation Media into the USB port located on the Interface Panel of the
Venue™.
3.) Turn on the system.
The opening screen is displayed.

4.) For new installation (after SSD replacement), tap Format SSD and Install.
If patient information is stored on the SSD, perform one of the following:
Select Update Venue SW to install software without affecting user data.

Figure 8-239 Venue™ Software - Installation Options

If Format Hard drive option selected, the Warning message appears:

Figure 8-240 Venue™ SSD Format- Warning Message

5.) Click Yes in the Warning message box.

6.) Automatic installation process runs. At the end of the process, the following message appears:

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-206

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) Select Exit and Reboot. Wait until the INFORMATION dialog box appears:

Figure 8-241 Venue™ Installation Process- Information Dialog Box

8.) Disconnect the SW installation media and tap OK in the message box.
9.) In the Confirmation dialog box that appears, tap Yes to continue the reboot.:

Figure 8-242 Venue™ Installation Process- Confirmation Dialog Box

10.)Tap Yes to continue the reboot.

11.)After the system reboots, the Venue™setup wizard welcome screen appears.:
12.)Select the interface language and tap OK to proceed.

Figure 8-243 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Welcome Screen

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-207

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Tap Run wizard to continue the installation.

Figure 8-244 Venue™ Installation Wizard - Run Wizard

14.)Enter the system serial number and tap OK to confirm.

Figure 8-245 Venue™ Installation Process- Set Serial Number

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-208

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

15.)Tap OK to confirm the serial number.

Figure 8-246 Venue™ Installation Process- Confirm Serial Number

16.)The settings screen appears. The Local tab opens by default.

17.)Continue with the EZ Config installation as specified in Section 3-6-2-1 on page 3-20.

Operating System and Application Software Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-209

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-5 Software Recovery Procedure

NOTE: Images in this procedure are for reference only. There may be differences or variations, in accordance
with different software versions.

The software recovery procedure allows the user to reload the operating system and the application
(Drive C:\ partition) without affecting any user information or PHI data.

This procedure can be initiated from the configuration screen under the Service tab.

1.) Boot the system into the application screen and open the Config menu.
2.) Open the Service tab.

Figure 8-247 Service Tab

3.) Select SW Recovery.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-210

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

4.) A pop up window will be displayed, notifying the user about the next steps..

Figure 8-248 Information window

5.) Select OK. Windows recovery options will be displayed.

6.) Select Troubleshoot.

Figure 8-249 Recovery Options

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-211

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

7.) select Venue SW reload.

Figure 8-250 Troubleshoot Window

8.) The system will reboot automatically and the Venue SW reload window will be displayed.

Figure 8-251 Venue SW Reload

9.) Select Reload Venue SW. The software reload process will start.
10.)Once the process is complete, The Venue SW reload window will be displayed again.
11.)Select Reboot Venue Scanner.
12.)The system will reboot.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-212

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

13.)Continue with Venue GO EZ Config Setup Wizard:

• EZ Config - Setup Wizard

Operating System and Application Software Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-213

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-10
Functional Checks to be Performed after Replacement Procedures
8-10-1 General Overview
Table 8-13 below lists the Functional Checks to be performed after each Replacement Procedure.
For easy reference, these are grouped in accordance with the various categories of Venue™
replacement parts.

NOTICE IMPORTANT - AFTER PERFORMING A REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE, ALWAYS REPORT TO

THE GE HealthCare SERVICE SYSTEM, AS DESCRIBED BELOW.

8-10-2 Functional Checks Required per Replacement Part Category

Table 8-13 lists the Functional Checks to be performed after each type of Replacement Procedure.
For quick reference, these are grouped in accordance with the various Venue™ part categories

Table 8-13 Replacement Procedures - Functional Checks Required

Repl. Part Category Replacement Procedure Functional Checks Required

Covers Lower Front eTower Cover Replacement

• No functional checks are required
Procedure
Left Side eTower Cover Replacement
• No functional checks are required
Procedure
Right Side eTower Cover Replacement
• No functional checks are required
Procedure
Mid Thermal Baffle Cover Replacement
• No functional checks are required
Procedure
Upper eTower Front Cover Replacement • Mechanical Functions Checks
Procedure

Front Base Cover Replacement Procedure • Mechanical Functions Checks

Upper eTower Front Cover Replacement

• No functional checks are required
Procedure
Printer Insert Cover Replacement Procedure • No functional checks are required
MPB Door Cover Replacement Procedure • No functional checks are required

RS Probe Cover Replacement Procedure • No functional checks are required

Riser Thermal Cover Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
Riser Cover Replacement Procedure
• Mechanical Functions Checks
• Ground Continuity Test

System Modules • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Base Module Replacement Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Mechanical Functions Checks
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Front End Metal Door Replacement
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-214

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-13 Replacement Procedures - Functional Checks Required (Continued)

Repl. Part Category Replacement Procedure Functional Checks Required

• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
SSD Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
SSD Module Replacement Procedure
Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Cockpit (Monitor) Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
PSU Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Battery Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Back End (BE) Module Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
MPB Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

T-CFE2 Module Replacement Procedure • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

T-CFE2 Module Replacement Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

T-PSB Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Electronic Boards • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

BIB Board Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
SSD Module Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
BIB Board Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

T-CFE Release Arm Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Front End Power Supply (T-FEPS) • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Replacement Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

T-CFE2 Fan box Replacement Procedure • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

T-CFE2 Fan box Replacement Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Mechanical Parts- Replacement Procedures
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Mechanical Parts MPB Front Metal Door Replacement

• No functional checks are required
Procedure

MPB Guide L and Guide R Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-215

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-13 Replacement Procedures - Functional Checks Required (Continued)

Repl. Part Category Replacement Procedure Functional Checks Required

• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
Halo Handle Replacement Procedure
• Mechanical Functions Checks
• Ground Continuity Test
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
Articulated Arm Replacement Procedure
• Mechanical Functions Checks
• Ground Continuity Test
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Venue Locking Release Handle • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
Replacement Procedure • Mechanical Functions Checks
• Ground Continuity Test
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Venue Locking Release Handle • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
Replacement Procedure • Mechanical Functions Checks
• Ground Continuity Test

Casters Replacement Procedure • Mechanical Functions Checks

T-CFE Plastic Cable Guide Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
MPB Blower (Fan) Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
IPP Module Replacement Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Ground Continuity Test

Cables MPB Rear USB Cable Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

ON/OFF Switch Cable Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.
• Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
PCIe Cable Replacement Procedure
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

MPB to BIB Control Cable Replacement • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics

Procedure • Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Printer USB Cable Replacement Procedure • No functional checks are required

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-216

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-13 Replacement Procedures - Functional Checks Required (Continued)

Repl. Part Category Replacement Procedure Functional Checks Required

Operating System and/or • Power on/Boot up
Application Software Operating System and Application Software • Power Shut Down
Loading Installation Procedure
• Probe/Connectors Check
OR
• 2D Mode (B Mode) Checks
Application Software (only) Installation
Procedure • M Mode Checks
• PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
• Audio Check
Note:
• Peripheral Checks
The above procedures are described in Software
Installation Procedure. • Perform 7-2-1 -System Diagnostics
• Select Full System Diagnostics without JIG.

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-217

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9
NOTE: This chapter gives you an overview of replacement parts for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner. In the
detailed Parts lists, illustrations are accompanied by FRU names, corresponding Part Numbers and a
compatibility matrix.

This Repl Proc icon indicates refer to the instructions in Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures.

NOTE: The illustrations provided in this chapter are for illustration purposes only and are subject to change
without notice.

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
• Assy - Assembly
• T-BEP - Back End Processor
• T-CFE Control Front End
• CRU Customer-replaceable Unit
• Ctrl - Control
• T-FEPS Front End Power Supply
• LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
• Int - Internal
• I/O - Input/Output
• T-PSB Probe Selection Board
• TS - Touch Screen

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-3
Main Assemblies and Sub Assemblies

Mechanical Hardware Parts

Cockpit (Monitor) Parts

eTower
Covers
Back End

Back End Cables

Front End

System Power Distribution

System Power Cables

(PSU, MPB, Batteries)

Accessories

Optional Peripherals

Figure 9-1 Venue™ System View

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-4
Renewal Parts Lists and Diagrams
9-4-1 Mechanical Hardware Parts

102
101

103
105

Figure 9-2 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 1

Table 9-14 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 1

Can Replace Can Be Not Rep

Item Part Name Part Number Replaced by Compatible l
Part #
Part # With Pro

101 CFE RELEASE ARM FRU S5430823 RP

102 T-CFE Plastic Cable Guide FRU S5432232 RP

103 MPB GUIDES L and R FRU S5737527 RP

Mechanical - RISER with Friction Adj.

104 S5759997-1 RP
hole FRU

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

107 108

106

109

110 111 112

Figure 9-3 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 2

Table 9-15 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 2

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With
105 MPB FAN SLEEVE FRU S5755990

106 Base Module - FRU S5759996 RP

107 Articular Arm Module with Locking - FRU S5759998-1 RP

108 Halo Handle with Locking - FRU S5759999-1 RP

109 Articular Arm Cover kit - FRU S5809899 RP

110 Venue Locking Release handle -FRU S5833112

111 Venue ESD drag chain - FRU S5833111

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

112 113 114

115

Figure 9-4 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 3

Table 9-16 Mechanical Hardware Parts - Diagram 3

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With

112 NO LOCK CASTOR FRU S5755602-1 RP

113 DIRECTIONAL and BRAKE LOCK CASTOR FRU S5755602 RP

114 Module - MPB RECEPTACLE - FRU S5730133

115 MPB BLOWER FRU S5755992 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-2 Covers

201 202 203 204 205

206 207

208
209

Figure 9-5 Covers - Diagram 1

Table 9-17 Covers - Diagram 1

Can Can Be Not
Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc CRU
Part # by Part # With
201 Cover: MPB Door FRU S5759973 RP

202 Cover: Mid Thermal Baffle - CRU S5759974-5 S5759974 RP

203 Cover: Scanner Door- FRU S5759978
204 Cover: Right Side eTower - CRU S5759982 RP

205 Cover: Left Side eTower - CRU S5759983 RP

206 Cover: Upper eTower Front - FRU S5759985 RP

207 Cover: Lower Front eTower - CRU S5759986 RP

208 Cover: Lower Front with ECG Support - CRU S5759986-2 RP

209 Cover: Printer Insert - FRU S5759987 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

211 213

210

215
219 218
212

217
216

214

Figure 9-6 Covers - Diagram 2

Table 9-18 Covers - Diagram 2

Can Can Be Not
Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc CRU
Part # by Part # With
210 Cover: Front Base FRU S5759988
211 Cover: Left Side Base- FRU S5759989
212 Cover: Right Side Base - FRU S5759990
213 Cover: Right Base Bottom - FRU S5759991 RP

214 Cover: Riser with Friction Adj. Hole FRU S5759992-1 RP

215 Cover: RS Probe Connector - CRU S5759993 RP

216 Cover: Riser Thermal - FRU S5759994 RP

217 Cover: Left Base Bottom - FRU S5759995 RP

218 MPB Front Metal door FRU S5731685 RP

219 Cover: Cockpit Rear Cables Cover - CRU S5800059

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-3 System Power Distribution

301 302 303 304

305 307
306

308 309

310

311
312

Figure 9-7 Power Parts

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-19 Power Parts

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With

301 Venue Battery Module Assy - FRU S5737214-1 S5792235-1 S5792235-1 RP

302 MODULE - MPB MAIN POWER BOARD- FRU S5731214P S5731214 RP

303 Venue AC/DC PS - FRU S5890246 S5730963-1 S5730963-1 RP

304 MODULE IPP - FRU S5730761 RP

305 Cable: PSU to MPB DC Docking - FRU S5721128 RP

306 Cable: ON-OFF switch - FRU S5737035 RP

307 Cable: MPB TO T-FEPS - FRU S5721141 RP

308 Cable: MPB To peripherals harness - FRU S5721126 RP

309 Cable: MPB TO COCKPIT - FRU S5721144-2 RP

310 Cable: MPB TO BIB CONTROL - FRU S5721137 RP

311 Cable: MPB TO BE PWR - FRU S5721129-5 RP

312 Cable: MPB REAR USB - FRU S5721620 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-4 Cockpit (Monitor) Parts

401

Figure 9-8 Cockpit (Monitor) Parts

Table 9-20 Cockpit (Monitor) Parts
Can Can Be Not
Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc CRU
Part # by Part # With
401 Module - Venue Getac AUO cockpit - FRU S5942054 S5832962 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-5 eTower

9-4-5-1 Front End

501 502 503 504

505

Figure 9-9 Electronic Boards and Assemblies

Table 9-21 Front End Components

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc CRU
Part # by Part # With

501 Module: T-PSB Probe Selection Board - FRU S5726584P S5726584 RP

502 Probe Locking Levers FRU S5809900

503 Module: T-FEPS Front End Power Supply - FRU S5721459P S5721459 RP
S5730757-
504 Venue T-CFE2 - FRU S5730757-2P S5730759 RP
2
S5730759-
505 Venue T-CFE2 FAN BOX - FRU S5730759-2P S5730757 RP
2

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-5-2 Back End

601 603 606

602

605

604

Figure 9-10 Back End

Table 9-22 Back End

Can Be Not
Can Replace Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replaced Compatible
Part # Proc
by Part # With
512GB SSD MODULE FRU Venue S5728760-4 S5728760-3
601 S5851010 RP
Venue 1TB SSD - FRU S5851010-1

602 Module- BIB BackEnd Interface - FRU S5727393 RP

603 BIB PLASTIC BRACKET - FRU S5728756

604 MODULE - BEP PCB - FRU S5881414 S5729618 RP

605 Venue BACKEND MODULE with APU - FRU S5897062-5 S5728755-1 RP

To be obtained
606 BIOS Battery (CR 2032)- FRU
locally

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-5-3 Back End Cables

701 702 703 704

705 706 707 708

709

Figure 9-11 Back End Cables

Table 9-23 Back End Cables

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With
701 Cable: MITX TO SSD PWR - FRU S5721127
702 Cable: BIB TO BE SPLIT CABLE - FRU S5721145
703 Cable: BE TO IO USB3 - FRU S5715745-5 S5715745
RP
704 Cable: BE TO IO LAN - FRU S5715747-2
705 Cable: BE TO IO DP HDMI - FRU S5715746
706 Cable: SATA DATA BE TO SSD A - FRU S5715743

707 Cable: BE to Cockpit - FRU S5715748-2 RP

708 Cable: Printer USB - FRU S5721142 RP

709 Cable: PCIe - FRU S5715744 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-6 Probes

Can Be Not
Can Replace
Part Name Part Number Picture Replaced by Compatible
Part #
Part # With

Probe: 6S- RS 5499316

Probe: L8-18i-RS 5499609

Probe: 3Sc- RS 5863286

Probe: L4-12t-RS 5435010

Probe: 8C - RS 5499508

Probe: 12L - RS 5499501

Probe: E8C-RS 5499516

Probe: 9L-RS 5499511

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Can Be Not
Can Replace
Part Name Part Number Picture Replaced by Compatible
Part #
Part # With

Probe: 6Tc - RS 5729431

Probe: C1 - 5 - RS 5499608

Probe:ML6-15-RS 5499610

Probe:L10-22-RS 5459953

Probe: 12S-RS 5499321

Probe:L4-20t-RS 5843289

Probe:L12n - RS 5505771

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Can Be Not
Can Replace
Part Name Part Number Picture Replaced by Compatible
Part #
Part # With

Probe: M5Sc - RS 5759970

Refer to Vscan Air

manual for latest
part number
Wireless probe CL Vscan Air –
Proprietary
Service Manual
GP091012-1EN

Refer to Vscan Air

manual for latest
part number
Wireless probe SL
Vscan Air –
Proprietary
Service Manual
GP091012-1EN

5770783

NOTE: Wireless
Probe: C2-9-RS probe is supported
for APU Back End
only (will not work
on CPU Back End)

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-7 Software

901

Figure 9-12 Software

Table 9-24 Software

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With
901 Venue Family BLANK DOK media S5903752

901 Venue™ R5 DOK SW media S5947037 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-8 System Power Cables

1001 1002 1003

1004 1005 1006

1007 1008 1009

Figure 9-13 System Power Cables

Table 9-25 System Power Cables

Can Can Be Not

Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Part # by Part # With
1001 Power Cable Australia 6736102-3 R2415383-7
1002 Power Cable Britain 6736107-3 R2415383-4
1003 Power Cable China 6736104-3 R2415383-6
1004 Power Cable Denmark 6736115-3 5439668
1005 Power Cable Europe 6736105-3 R2418616
1006 Power Cable Israel 6736109-3 R2415383-1
1007 Power Cable Japan 6736111-3 R2415383-5
1008 Power Cable Switzerland 6736113-3 R2415383-8
1009 Power Cable USA/Canada 6736114-3 R2269460-2
1010 Power Cable Brazil 6736103-3 5405959
1011 Power Cable INDIA 6736116-3 R2421019

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-25 System Power Cables

Can Can Be Not

Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Part # by Part # With
1012 Power Cable Denmark Non hospital grade 6736106-11 S6736106-2
1013 Cable: Venue BEP to WIFI+BT - FRU S5936580

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-20

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-9 Accessories

1101 1102 1103

Figure 9-14 Accessories

Table 9-26 Accessories

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Item Part Name Part Number Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With

1101 Venue Basic Storage Basket - CRU S5767134 RP

1102 Venue Large Storage Basket - CRU S5767133 RP

1103 Venue Power Cable Holder - CRU S5766312 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-10 Optional Peripherals

1201
1202 1203

1204

1205
1206
1207

1208
1209

1210

Figure 9-15 Optional Peripherals

Table 9-27 Optional Peripherals

Part Can Can Be Not Repl

Item Part Name Replace Replace Compati
Number Proc
Part # d by ble With

1201 Printer UP-D711MD Kit 5449734 RP

1202 Printer Support Kit Spare Part S5767756 RP

1203 USB Barcode Reader - CRU S5767381

1204 Wi-Fi adapter (Netgear A8000) - CRU S5938788 5728576 RP

1205 Wi-Fi Support Kit S5767760 RP

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-22

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-27 Optional Peripherals

Part Can Can Be Not Repl

Item Part Name Replace Replace Compati
Number Proc
Part # d by ble With
RFID Reader Wave ID Plus rfIDEAS Dual-frequency Card
1206 S5889925
Reader

1207 RFID mechanical kit S5918512

not
supported
Zebra USB Bar code Reader - CRU for software
1208 S5932297
Note: supported from R4.1 software and higher. versions
lower
than R4.1

1209 Venue Wireless probe charger - CRU S5937225

1210 BT adapter TPLINK UB500 for Venue Family - CRU S5938789

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

9-4-11 ECG List of spare parts

Table 9-28 ECG Parts

Can Can Be Not

Repl
Part Name Part Number Picture Replace Replaced Compatible
Proc
Part # by Part # With
Norav ECG Kit CRU- S5855901 RP
Germany

Norav ECG Kit CRU- IEC S5855902 RP

Norav ECG Kit CRU-

S5855903 RP
AHA

ECG Leads USA (AHA) 5146056

ECG Leads ROW (IEC) 5146739

USB Cable for ECG 5146055 RP

ECG External Cable S2413451

CAUTION USE ONLY APPROVED, DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF ECG PATIENT CABLES.

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9-24

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 10
Care and Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Care and Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your Venue™ System does not have any high wear
components that fail with use, therefore no Care and Maintenance inspections are mandatory.
However, some customers’ Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or
inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

10-1-2 Purpose of Chapter 10

This chapter describes the Care and Maintenance procedures for the Venue™ ultrasound scanner and
its peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the Ultrasound system’s
performance.

Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-2
Warnings

DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES INSIDE THE CAGE, THE BATTERY,
THE AC DISTRIBUTION BOX, AND THE DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
BOARD (DIB) THAT COULD BE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO
DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND TO TURN OFF THE
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS.
PROCEED WITH CAUTION WHENEVER POWER IS ON AND COVERS
ARE REMOVED.

DANGER DO NOT PULL OUT OR INSERT CIRCUIT BOARDS WHILE MAINS

POWER TO THE SYSTEM IS ON.

CAUTION PRACTICE GOOD ESD PREVENTION. WEAR AN ANTI-STATIC STRAP WHEN HANDLING
ELECTRONIC PARTS AND WHEN DISCONNECTING/CONNECTING CABLES.

CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS ULTRASOUND SYSTEM UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME
PANELS ARE SECURELY IN PLACE. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.

CAUTION TO ENSURE MUTUAL PROTECTION AND SFAETY OF GE HealthCare SERVICE PERSONNEL

AND OUR CUSTOMERS, ALL EQUIPMENT AND WORK AREAS MUST BE CLEAN AND FREE OF
ANY HAZARDOUS CONTAMINANTS BEFORE A SERVICE ENGINEER STARTS A REPAIR. THIS
INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, DECONTAMINATION AND/OR STERILIZATION,
DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION OR USE OF THE MEDICAL DEVICE.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-2

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-3
Why Do Maintenance?
10-3-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of all corrective maintenance and
periodic maintenance on Ultrasound systems where it is applicable. The Ultrasound Equipment Quality
Check form provides the customer with documentation that the Ultrasound system is maintained on a
periodic basis.

A copy of the Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form should be kept in the same room as the
Venue™ ultrasound scanner, or nearby.

10-3-2 Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customer’s responsibility to have a Quality Assurance program in place for each Ultrasound
scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicist, the supervising radiologist/physician or
appropriate designee.

Routine Quality Control testing of the system must be conducted regularly. The same tests are
performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective
action can be taken.

Testing results, corrective action, and the effects of corrective action, must be documented and
maintained on site.

Your GE HealthCare Service Representative can help you with establishing, performing and
maintaining records for a Quality Assurance program. Contact GE HealthCare for coverage and/or price
for service.

10-3-3 Maintenance Task Schedule

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?

The Customer Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided in Table 10-2 on page 10-4) specifies how
often the Venue™ ultrasound scanner should be serviced, and outlines items requiring special
attention.

NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Care and Maintenance procedures are performed on the
Venue™ ultrasound scanner as scheduled in order to retain the high levels of safety, dependability, and
system performance.

Your GE HealthCare Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your Venue™ ultrasound
scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Contact GE HealthCare for
coverage information and/or price for service.

The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Customer Care & Maintenance Task
Schedule assumes that you use your Venue™ scanner for an average patient load (10-12 patients per
day) and that you do not use it as a primary mobile Ultrasound system which is transported between
diagnostic facilities.

NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, it is strongly recommended to increase
the care and maintenance frequencies.

Please refer to the Customer Care Schedule in the service manual for the Ultrasound System unit for
the correct maintenance care schedule.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Table 10-2 Customer Care & Maintenance Task Schedule

Per
Facility’s
Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly QA Program Notes

Clean Probes •* * or before each use

Clean Probe Holders •

Inspect the cable weekly for cuts and
abrasions, to verify it is intact
Ensure the cable paths are away from foot
Inspect AC Mains Cable • traffic (i.e.: cable is not positioned in the
passage nor underneath system casters).
Verify the cable along a wall if possible, to
avoid stepping on the cable, that will lead to
the squishing and wear of the cable.

Inspect Cables and Connectors •

Clean Console •
Clean Cockpit •
Inspect Wheels, Casters, Brakes and
Swivel Locks
• Mobile Unit: Check Daily

Check Articulated Arm Movement • Mobile Unit: Check Daily

Functional Checks • Also after corrective maintenance.

Safety Test •* * Recommended Once a year

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-4

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1 Tools Required for Servicing the Venue™
The following tools (TORX bits or drivers) are needed to service the ultrasound scanner. .

Table 10-3 Tools Used for Servicing the Venue™

Item No. Tool Size Torque Comments

1. Bit # TX-10 M2.5

2. Bit # TX-15 M3

3. Bit # TX-20 M4 • 90 degree “L“ are suggested.

4. Bit # TX-25 M5 • A full set of 90 degree “L“TORX wrenches are recommended.

5. Bit # TX-30 M6

6. Bit # TX-45 M10

Socket Set
7.
(must include 7mm socket)

8. Side cutter (diagonal) 5 or 6 inch

9. Flat Blade Driver 3.2 mm

10. Flat Blade Driver 4 mm

11. Flat Blade Driver 6 mm

12. Phillips Driver PH1

13. Phillips Driver PH2

14. Phillips Driver PH3

15. Hex Key 1.5 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

16. Hex Key 2 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

17. Hex Key 2.5 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

18. Hex Key 3 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

19. Hex Key 4 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

20. Hex Key 5 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

21. Hex Key 6 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

22. Hex Key 8 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

23. Hex Key 10 mm (Unbrako Key / Allen Key)

24. Nut Driver 5 mm

25. Nut Driver 3/16 inch

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take approximately 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the Venue™ User Manual
whenever necessary.

Table 10-4 System Preliminary Checks

Step Item Description

1. Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.

2. Paperwork Fill in the top of the EQC inspection form. Record all probes and Ultrasound system options.

• Turn the Ultrasound system power ON and verify that all fans and peripherals turn On.
• Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are
3. Power-up displayed.
• Where applicable, confirm that the battery is charged. If no AC Input present, use the
internal battery.

4. Probes Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.

5. Displays Verify proper display on the Monitor and Touch Screen.

6. Review Error Logs Where applicable, Error Logs can be reviewed via system diagnostics.

7. Presets Back-up all Customer Presets onto appropriate media.

8. Image Archive Back up the Image Archive onto appropriate media.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-6

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-2 Functional Checks

NOTE: Refer also to Chapter 4 - General Procedures and Functional Checks, for additional details about the
functional checks described in this section.

The functional checks take approximately 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Venue™ User Manual
whenever necessary.

10-5-2-1 System Checks

Table 10-5 System Functional Checks

Step Item (or Mode) Description

Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation.

1 B-Mode
Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation.

2 CF-Mode
Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available).

3 Doppler Modes
Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic M-Mode operation.

4 M-Mode
Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

5 Basic Measurements Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement.

Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Contrast. Check the basic
6 Applicable Software Options
Ultrasound system controls that affect each option’s operation.

7 Monitor Verify basic monitor display functions.

8 Peripherals See: Peripheral/Option Checks .

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.

Refer to the Venue™ User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.

Table 10-6 GE HealthCare Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

Step Item Description

1 Media Verify media drive(s) read/write properly.

2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

3 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.

4 ECG Verify basic operation with customer.

10-5-2-3 Mains Cable Inspection

Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection, As Appropriate

Step Item Description

1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall outlet and from the Ultrasound system.

Inspect the cable weekly for cuts and abrasions, to verify it is intact
Ensure the cable paths are away from foot traffic (i.e.: cable is not positioned in the passage
2 Inspect nor underneath system casters).
Verify the cable along a wall if possible, to avoid stepping on the cable, that will lead to the
squishing and wear of the cable.

Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals,
3 Verify
and that no strands may cause a short circuit.

4 Verify Verify that the Inlet connector retainer is functional.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-8

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-3 Physical Inspection

Table 10-8 Physical Checks

Step Item Description

1 Labeling Verify that all Ultrasound system labeling is present and in readable condition.

2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the exterior for dents, scratches or cracks.

Where applicable, verify all covers are secured in place and are properly aligned with other covers.
3 Covers
Replace any covers that are damaged.

4 Input Power Refer to: Mains Cable Inspection .

5 External I/O Check all connectors for damage.

• Where applicable, check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop
6 Wheels and Brakes the Ultrasound system from moving, and release mechanism.
• Where applicable, check all wheel locks and wheel swiveling for proper operation.

Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay
11 Cables and Connectors
special attention to probe strain or bend reliefs.

Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
12 Shielding and Covers
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.

13 Probe Holders Where applicable, inspect the Probe Holders for cracks or damage.

Power and System

14 Check for proper operation of all Power and System Status Indicators.
Status Indicators

Where applicable, check that the battery is not damaged, does not leak, does not emit an odor, and
15 Battery is not deformed or discolored. Observe all warnings and cautions for battery handling, recharging,
storing, and/or disposal.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-4 Cleaning

10-5-4-1 General Cleaning

Frequent and diligent cleaning of the Venue™ ultrasound unit reduces the risk of spreading infection
from person to person, and also helps to maintain a clean working environment.

CAUTION WHEN PERFORMING CLEANING PROCEDURES, TO PREVENT THE RISK OF SYSTEM

DAMAGE, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

• Use only cleaning materials and solutions as recommended in the procedures described in the
Venue™ User Manual.
• Do not use any solutions or products not listed in the Venue™ User Manual.
• Never use thinner, benzene, ethanol or methanol alcohol, abrasive cleaners, or other strong
solvents. Only use isopropyl alcohol, when instructed to do so.
• Do not spray any liquid directly onto the Venue™ covers.
• Do not allow any liquid to drip or seep into the system.
• DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may
result in damage to the panel.
• Make sure not to spill or spray any liquid on the controls, into the Venue™ cabinet, or in the probe
connection receptacle.
• Prior to cleaning, turn OFF power to the Venue™ and disconnect the mains cable.

NOTE: Refer to the Venue™ User Manual for cleaning instructions

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-10

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-4-2 Cleaning the Touch Panel Display

1.) To allow cleaning of the touch panel display without affecting the system operation, tap
Settings, and then tap Clean button.

Figure 10-252 Settings Menu - Clean Button

The screen turns black, allowing you to use a soft cloth with glass cleaning solution to clean the
panel.
2.) Using your finger swipe the arrows >>> from left to right to return to normal operation.

Figure 10-253 Cleaning Mode

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-5 Probe Maintenance

Refer to the Venue™ User Manual, or the probe’s User Manual/Probe Care Card for probe
maintenance, checks, cleaning, and disinfecting instructions.

CAUTION TO HELP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BLOOD-BORNE DISEASES WHEN CLEANING AND
HANDLING PROBES, WEAR APPROVED, NON-ALLERGIC DISPOSABLE GLOVES. THESE ARE
MADE OF NITRILE DERIVED FROM VEGETABLE STARCH TO PREVENT ALLERGIC LATEX
REACTIONS.

CAUTION FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PRESCRIBED CLEANING OR DISINFECTION PROCEDURES WILL

VOID THE PROBE’S WARRANTY.
DO NOT SOAK THE PROBE OR WIPE THE PROBE LENS WITH ANY PRODUCT NOT LISTED IN
THE Venue™ USER MANUAL. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO THE
PROBE.
FOLLOW THE CARE INSTRUCTIONS SUPPLIED WITH THE PROBE.

WARNING DISINFECT A DEFECTIVE PROBE BEFORE YOU RETURN IT. BE SURE TO TAG THE
PROBE AS BEING DISINFECTED.

CAUTION TRANSESOPHAGEAL AND INTRAOPERATIVE PROBES REQUIRE A SPECIAL HANDLING.

RFER TO THE USER DOCUMENTATION ENCLOSED WITH THESE PROBES.

NOTE: GE HealthCare does not substantiate the effectiveness of recommended disinfectant products.
Questions regarding efficacy, instructions for use, and proper handling should be directed to the
disinfectant manufacturer. GE HealthCare publishes a list of material-compatible disinfectants (see
below and also refer to the GE HealthCare website at http://www3.gehealthcare.com/en/Products/
Categories/Ultrasound/Ultrasound Probes. DO NOT use non-GE HealthCare-approved disinfectants or
products that have not been evaluated by GE HealthCare for material compatibility. Damages linked to
the use of disapproved chemicals are not covered under product warranty or service contract.).

10-5-6 Probe Related Checks

Table 10-9 Probe Related Checks

Step Item Description

1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

Thoroughly check the Ultrasound system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the
2 Probes
connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.

3 Probes Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.

10-5-7 Probe Handling

All Venue™ probes are designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free, reliable service. To ensure
this, the correct handling of probes is important and the following points should be noted:
• Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may damage the probe elements and
the acoustic lens, or may crack the housing.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-12

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

• Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe must not be
used. Call your field service representative immediately for a replacement.
• Perform a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe
• Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged cable may compromise the
electrical safety of the probe.
• To avoid the risk of a probe accidentally falling, do not allow the probe cables to become entangled
with, or to be caught in the wheels of the system.
• Protect the probe when moving the unit.
• Use a soft cloth and warm, soapy water to clean the probe.

Note: For detailed information on handling Endocavity probes, refer to the appropriate supplementary
instructions for each probe.

10-5-8 Basic Probe Care

The Venue™ User Manual and the individual probe manufacturers’ handling cards provide a complete
description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely
familiar with the proper care of GE HealthCare probes.

NOTE: The most recent, up-to-date information on probes and probe care is available at:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/ultrasound/products/probe_care.html

WARNING ANY EVIDENCE OF WEAR ON A PROBE INDICATES THAT IT MUST NOT BE USED.
IMPROPER HANDLING MAY EASILY DAMAGE ULTRASOUND PROBES.

SEE THE Venue™ USER MANUAL AND ALSO REFER TO THE PROBE
MANUFACTURER’S HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS, FOR MORE DETAILS.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. FAILURE TO PROPERLY HANDLE OR MAINTAIN A PROBE
MAY ALSO VOID ITS WARRANTY.

Always perform a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.

When handling probes, always observe the precautions listed in Probe Handling .

The Interoperative probes often have special usage considerations; always refer to the individual probe
manufacturers’ handling instructions/user manual.

10-5-9 Probe Cleaning

10-5-9-1 Basic Probe Cleaning

NOTE: For details on general probe cleaning, refer to the information provided in the Venue™ User Manual.

NOTE: For specific probe cleaning instructions, refer to the individual probe Users Manual (or care card
supplied with the probe).

CAUTION TO HELP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BLOOD-BORNE DISEASES WHEN CLEANING AND
HANDLING PROBES, WEAR APPROVED, NON-ALLERGIC DISPOSABLE GLOVES.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-5-10 Returning and Shipping of Defective Probes

WARNING ALWAYS DISINFECT A DEFECTIVE PROBE BEFORE RETURNING IT TO THE

MANUFACTURER. BE SURE TO TAG THE PROBE AS BEING DISINFECTED.

CAUTION TO HELP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BLOOD-BORNE DISEASES WHEN CLEANING AND
HANDLING PROBES, WEAR APPROVED, NON-ALLERGIC DISPOSABLE GLOVES.

Equipment being returned must be properly clean and free of blood and other potentially infectious
contaminants.

GE HealthCare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior
to shipment. GE HealthCare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/
equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstances should a
part or equipment be shipped before being visibly clean and properly disinfected.

The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
persons who will receive and/or open the package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping
with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient
care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a
hazardous material.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-14

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-6
Electrical Safety Tests
10-6-1 Overview
The following topics and measurements are covered in this subsection:
• Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
• Safety Test Overview
• Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA and Canada
• Grounding Continuity

10-6-2 Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)

NOTE: For all instructions in the “Electrical safety tests” section in case of using a UPS (uninterrupted
power supply) the terms outlet, wall outlet, AC wall outlet and power outlet refer to the AC
power outlet of the UPS. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the same
used UPS, these must remain unused i.e. not connected to any other devices.

CAUTION Please observe that some Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) may not be medical
devices! If the UPS is not a medical device, it has to be located outside of the patient
environment (according to IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-6-3 Safety Test Overview

DANGER TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM UNDER TEST MUST NOT
BE CONNECTED TO OTHER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. REMOVE ALL
INTERCONNECTING CABLES AND WIRES. THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM UNDER TEST
MUST NOT BE CONTACTED BY USERS OR PATIENTS WHILE PERFORMING THESE
TESTS.

WARNING Energy Control and Power Lockout for Venue™ .

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater
than 30 volts:
1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.
2. Turn off the breaker.
3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.
4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.
5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to
verify isolation.
6. Remove/disconnect the battery if present.
Ultrasound System components may be energized.
Capacitors on Ultrasound Systems with the Shearwave Option can take up to 5 minutes to
discharge.

CAUTION Possible risk of infection.

Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in
patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the
equipment.
NOTE: For all instructions in the “Electrical safety tests” section, in the event of using a UPS
(uninterrupted power supply) the terms outlet, wall outlet, AC wall outlet and power outlet refer
to the AC power outlet of the UPS. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the
same used UPS, these must remain unused i.e. not connected to any other devices.
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on IEC60601 standard including national deviations
for Health Care Facilities and IEC 62353 Medical electrical equipment – Recurrent test and test after
repair of medical electrical equipment. These standards provide guidance on evaluating electrical safety
of medical devices which are placed into service and are intended for use in care and maintenance or
testing following service or repair activities. They differ somewhat from the standards that are used for
design verification and manufacturing tests (e.g., IEC 60601-1 including national deviations) which
require a controlled test environment and can place unnecessary stress on the Ultrasound system.

These tests may refer to specific safety analyzer equipment as an example. Always refer to the safety
analyzer’s user manual that will be used to perform the tests.

Prior to initiating any electrical test, the Ultrasound system must be visually inspected. Perform the
following visual checks:

• Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts.
• Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of
strain relief and cable clamps.
• Locate and examine all associated transducers. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end.
Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-16

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

WARNING Users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is suspected
and on a regular basis in accordance with local authorities and facility procedures.
DO NOT use the Venue™ or individual probes which fail any portion of the safety test.

WARNING To minimize risk of electric shock, only trained persons are allowed to perform the electrical
safety inspections and tests.

CAUTION Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests
(e.g. last year etc). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult
experienced authorized service personnel or GE HealthCare for further analysis.

CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the Ultrasound system under test MUST NOT be connected to
other electrical equipment.
Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The Ultrasound system under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-6-4 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA and Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.

1. Correct Wiring 4. Open Neutral Wire

2. Open Ground Wire 5. Hot and Ground Reversed

3. Reversed Polarity 6. Open Hot Wire

Figure 10-254 Typical Alternate Outlet Test

NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-18

P R E L I M I N A R Y
DIRECTION DOC2782487, REVISION 2 VENUE™ SERVICE MANUAL

10-6-5 Grounding Continuity

DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD!

THE PATIENT OR OPERATOR MUST NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE
EQUIPMENT DURING THIS TEST.

Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1.

1. GROUND PIN
2. OHMMETER
3. Venue™
4. ACCESSIBLE METAL PART:
• MONITOR HOUSING
• REAR PANEL CONNECTOR
• ANY CASTER/WHEEL SUPPORT

Figure 10-255 Ground Continuity Test

Chapter 10 - Care and Maintenance 10-19

© 2024 by General Electric Company

GE Medical Systems
Ultrasound & Primary Care Diagnostics LLC
3200 N Grandview Blvd
Wauwatosa, WI 53188
USA

www.gehealthcare.com